JP7664878B2 - Cooking device and cooking system - Google Patents

Description

The present disclosure relates to a cooking device that heats an object to be heated, such as a pot placed on a top plate, and a cooking system that uses the cooking device.

Generally, cooking appliances are roughly divided into three types based on the environment in which they are used.
One of them is the so-called "built-in type" which is installed inside kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter. The second type is the "free-standing type" which is placed in a specific position on kitchen furniture like a gas stove (also called a "gas-burning table"). The third type is the small and portable "tabletop type" which is placed in a desired position on a dining table, etc.

There are many "built-in" cooking appliances that are multi-purpose cooking appliances equipped with multiple types of heat sources, and they are popular as they can handle a variety of cooking methods. However, because they are installed inside kitchen furniture, the external dimensions must be designed to match the standards of general kitchen furniture, and there is much less freedom in design compared to "freestanding" or "tabletop" appliances, making it difficult to turn them into practical products.

As a typical combined cooking device that can expand the range of cooking methods, a device has been proposed that has a grill chamber (also called an "oven chamber" or "heating chamber", but hereafter referred to collectively as the "heating chamber") inside the main body that is heated by a heat source, and that introduces microwaves from a microwave heating source into the heating chamber (see Patent Document 1).

In the combined cooking device shown in Patent Document 1, for example, cooking can be performed using different types of heating means above the top plate (first location) and in the internal space of the heating chamber (second location). This has the advantage of being able to handle a variety of foods. The convenience of this cooking device can be further improved if cooking condition data (recipe data) for the food desired by the user can be obtained from outside via a network or communication terminal.

Meanwhile, a cooking system has been proposed in the past in which communication is performed between a communication terminal such as a smartphone and a cooking appliance, and recipe data corresponding to a cooking recipe selected on the communication terminal is transmitted from the communication terminal to the cooking appliance to perform cooking (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Patent Document 2 proposes a configuration in which, although not a combined cooking device, it is a cooking device (gas-fired cooking device) that has multiple heating sections (e.g., right burner, left burner, rear burner) and has a communication function, and when a user operates a communication terminal to select a specific recipe from a cooking menu, the cooking device acquires heating condition data for the multiple heating sections all at once.

Furthermore, Patent Document 3 proposes a menu creation support device that efficiently supports the creation of healthy menus that contain nutrients suitable for the user and can be made with existing ingredients.

Furthermore, Patent Document 4 proposes a nutritional component display system that includes a server device and a client device (such as a personal computer) connected to a network. This is a system that analyzes and displays the amount of nutritional components for each ingredient in response to user input.

Furthermore, Patent Document 5 proposes a voice recognition device that enters a voice input state when a button is pressed and ends the voice input state when the button is released.

JP 2021-071264 A (page 1, FIG. 44) JP 2017-106685 A JP 2001-243326 A JP 2006-139554 A JP 2001-42890 A

In recent years, interest in various cooking methods and the need for dietary management have increased among households and individuals.
In cooking appliances, especially in combined cooking appliances, the setting of control conditions (e.g., heat power, heating time, etc.) becomes more complicated as the number of heating means increases. Therefore, convenience would be improved if users could select a cooking menu, obtain cooking condition data (recipe data), and use this data easily.
However, the technologies described in Patent Documents 3 and 4 only show a large-scale (for professional businesses) menu information extraction system and a nutrient content search (information processing) system, and do not take into consideration reducing the input of cooking devices. Therefore, even the technologies described in Patent Documents 3 and 4 do not fully meet users' expectations of reducing the input operation load.
Furthermore, the technology described in Patent Document 5 also requires the user to keep pressing one input button for the entire duration of voice input, and thus cannot reduce the burden of user operations.

The primary objective of the present disclosure is to provide a highly convenient cooking device and cooking system that can handle a wide variety of cooking methods by enabling voice input and improving user operability.

The cooking device according to the first disclosure includes:
The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on an upper surface of the main body;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
an input operation unit for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means and the second heating means;
A notification means;
a control device that receives a command from the input operation unit,
the input operation unit includes a first selection means for selecting one of a plurality of cooking modes using the first heating means and the second heating means, and a dial-type selection means for selecting one cooking menu or control menu executable in the cooking mode when one of the cooking modes is selected by the first selection means,
the first selection means has a touch input key;
the input operation unit issues a voice input mode setting signal in response to an operation time of the input key;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

The cooking system according to the second disclosure includes:
A heating cooker;
A cloud server or a communication terminal connected to the cooking appliance via wireless communication;
Equipped with
The communication terminal or the cloud server has a function of transmitting recipe data to the cooking appliance,
the cooking device has a function of acquiring the recipe data from the communication terminal or the cloud server after an initial standby screen is displayed,
The cooking device has an operation unit equipped with touch-type input keys,
The operation unit has a function of selecting one cooking mode and a function of switching from a touch input mode to a voice input mode according to a touch state of the input key,
The cooking device is provided with a dial-type selection means for selecting one of a plurality of linked cooking menus or a plurality of control menus for cooking in the cooking mode in response to a rotation operation;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the third disclosure is
The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on an upper surface of the main body;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
an input operation unit for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means and the second heating means;
A notification means;
an input signal analysis unit that determines an input from the input operation unit;
A control device that receives commands from the input operation unit;
Equipped with
the input operation unit includes a first selection means for selecting one from a plurality of cooking modes using the first heating means and the second heating means, and a dial-type selection means for selecting at least one of a cooking menu or a control menu in the cooking mode selected by the first selection means,
the first selection means is a touch-type input key provided for each of the cooking modes,
the input operation unit transmits time information corresponding to the touch operation of the input key to the input signal analysis unit;
when the input signal analysis unit determines that a voice input mode command has been received, the control device enables acquisition of recipe data from an external device and receives command data for executing the recipe data;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

The cooking system according to the fourth disclosure is
A heating cooker;
A cloud server connected to the cooking appliance via a network using wireless communication;
It is equipped with
The cloud server has a function of transmitting recipe data to the cooking appliance,
the cooking device has a function of switching from a touch input mode to a voice input mode in response to a touch state of a touch-type input key, and a function of selecting at least one of a cooking menu, a control menu, and a control condition by a dial-type selection means for each cooking mode selected in the touch input mode;
The cooking appliance is switched to the voice input mode and is in a standby state in which the recipe data can be acquired,
When the cloud server receives a request to provide the recipe data, the cloud server transmits the recipe data to the cooking appliance;
The cooking device acquires command data related to the recipe data in the voice input mode;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the fifth disclosure is
The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on an upper surface of the main body;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
an input operation unit for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means and the second heating means;
A notification means;
a control device that receives a command from the input operation unit,
the input operation unit has, as touch input means, a first selection means for selecting one from a plurality of cooking modes using the first heating means and the second heating means, a second selection means for selecting one cooking menu or control menu from the cooking modes selected by the first selection means, and a third selection means for selecting a control condition to be applied to the cooking menu or the control menu selected by the second selection means;
The input operation unit has a dial type selection means,
The dial type selection means is
(1) selecting at least one of the cooking menu, the control menu, or the control condition in response to a rotation operation; and
(2) When an operation other than the rotation operation is performed, a voice input mode setting signal is generated.
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

The cooking system according to the sixth disclosure is
A cooking device and a communication terminal connected to a cloud server via a network,
The communication terminal or the cloud server has a function of transmitting recipe data to the cooking appliance,
The cooking device has a function of acquiring the recipe data from the communication terminal or the cloud server,
The cooking device is provided with a touch-type input key for selecting one cooking mode from among a plurality of cooking modes using a combination of a plurality of heating means, and a dial-type selection means for selecting at least one from among a plurality of cooking menus or control menus provided for each of the cooking modes in response to a rotation operation,
The cooking device has a function of moving the dial-type selection means in the axial direction of the rotation center to set the mode to a voice input mode;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

According to the present disclosure, a highly convenient cooking device can be provided that can use both touch input and voice input during the cooking setup stage and can cook using recipe data obtained from outside via a network.
In addition, according to the cooking system disclosed herein, when selecting a cooking menu, the touch state of the touch-type input keys can be determined and the mode can be automatically changed to voice input mode, making it possible for the user to input control conditions by voice during input operations, thereby contributing to improving the efficiency of input operations and reducing the input load on the user.

1 is a conceptual diagram showing a communication system (information processing network) between one house according to a first embodiment and the outside. 1 is a perspective view of an installed state of a cooking device according to a first embodiment of the present disclosure; FIG. 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 3 is a schematic plan view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a central display unit, a central operation unit, and a central heating status display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 3 is an enlarged explanatory diagram 1 showing an example of the operation of the central display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 3 is an enlarged explanatory diagram 2 showing an example of the operation of the central display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing main functional components of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of a control device and an input operation unit (central operation unit) of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is an explanatory diagram showing all the types of control menus that can be selected by a central operation unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2; 3 is a classification table of control menus for the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a table showing various cooperative cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 during standby. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 in a coordinated cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 in a coordinated cooking mode; FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example of the display content of the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 in a coordinated cooking mode. 3 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 in a coordinated cooking mode. 3 is a flowchart 1 showing an operation of acquiring recipe data from an external source in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a flowchart showing main input steps for three cooking modes after the main power is turned on in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process after the main power is turned on in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2. 3 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process in the case of a coordinated cooking mode in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process in a combined cooking mode in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process in the case of a single cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a flowchart 1 showing an operation of acquiring recipe data from an external source in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a flowchart 2 showing an operation of acquiring recipe data from an external source in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of the control device when switching to a voice input mode 1 in the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display on a central display unit 16M, illustrating an example of an input process for an integrated cooking mode in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the central display section corresponding to each main operation step after the main power switch is turned on. FIG. 6 is an enlarged plan view illustrating the operation of the left display portion of the cooking appliance. 4 is a process diagram illustrating the operation steps of the control device from when the cooking appliance is started to immediately before cooking begins. FIG. 2 is an enlarged plan view showing a central operation unit and a central display unit of the cooking device. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the central display unit in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between cooking steps of a cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode and operations of the input operation unit. 1 is a time chart 1 for explaining an entire section in which recipe data can be acquired and control operations in a cooperative cooking mode in a cooking appliance; 1 is a time chart 1 showing the relationship between the central operation unit and the central display unit in chronological order. FIG. 35 is a time chart 1 showing a modified example for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable section and control operation in the cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG. 34 . FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit in a coordinated cooking mode corresponding to the modified example of FIG. 36 . 5 is a time chart for explaining an overall period during which recipe data can be acquired and control operations in the collaborative cooking mode. 5 is a flowchart showing main processes of the control device up to the start of cooking based on recipe data obtained from an external source. 3 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of a control device when a voice input mode is switched to in the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a control menu displayed on the central display unit when the central operation unit is operated for a combined cooking mode. 6 is a time chart illustrating a method for preventing interference between voice input modes when cooking is performed simultaneously using the central operation unit and the left operation unit. FIG. 11 is a conceptual diagram showing a communication system (information processing network) between one house and the outside according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the cooking device shown in FIG. 43 . FIG. 44 is a block diagram showing the main functional components of the cooking device shown in FIG. 43 . FIG. 44 is a block diagram showing the main functional components of the communication terminal shown in FIG. 43. FIG. 1 (list) is an explanatory diagram for explaining operations when cooking in the coordinated cooking mode is performed using the central operating unit. FIG. 2 (table) is an explanatory diagram for explaining operations when cooking in the coordinated cooking mode is performed using the central operation unit. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the display content of a reception operation display screen displayed on the central display unit. This shows the display contents of the terminal display screen (input operation screen) of the communication terminal. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of an operation of the communication terminal when recipe data is acquired from a cloud server. FIG. 11 is a conceptual diagram showing the configuration of a communication system (information processing network) between one house and the outside according to the third embodiment. FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the cooking device shown in FIG. 52 . A time chart showing the main operational steps of the control device of the cooking appliance shown in Figure 52 and the operational steps of the external information processing network (first server, audio input/output device, etc.). FIG. 13 is an enlarged plan view of a central display unit and a central operating unit of a cooking device according to a fourth embodiment. 56 is an enlarged plan view of the right display section and right operating section of the cooking device of FIG. 55. A block diagram showing the functional configuration of the control device and input operation unit (central operation unit) of the heating cooker shown in Figure 55. 56 is a flowchart 1 showing the input process of the left and right operating parts after the main power is turned on in the cooking device shown in FIG. 55. 56 is a flowchart showing an input process of a central operation unit after the main power is turned on in the cooking device shown in FIG. 55. 56 is a time chart showing the input process of the central operation unit after the main power is turned on in the cooking device shown in FIG. 55. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the central display unit and the central operation unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 55 before acquiring recipe data from outside and transitioning to a collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the central operation unit and the central display unit when obtaining recipe data for the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 55 . 6 is a time chart illustrating a method for preventing interference between voice input modes when cooking is performed simultaneously using the central operation unit and the left operation unit.

The cooking device and cooking system according to the present disclosure will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following description, directional terms (e.g., "up," "down," "right," "left," "front," "rear," etc.) are used to facilitate understanding, but these are for explanatory purposes only. In addition, in each drawing, items with the same reference numerals are the same or equivalent, and this is common throughout the entire specification.

Furthermore, in the following description, a composite cooking device equipped with multiple types of heating means will also be referred to simply as a "cooking device."

In the following explanation, when we say "a heated object placed on the top plate," it means that it includes both cases where the heated object, such as a pot, is placed directly on the top surface of the top plate 3 (described below) and heated, and cases where the heated object is placed on a supporting member, such as a trivet, that is arranged above the top plate, such as a gas burner, and heated.

In the first embodiment, the "second heating means" HM2 refers to a heat source for heating the food placed inside the heating chamber 6, which will be described later. It may also be one that uses radiant heat or steam.

In the first embodiment, a magnetron is used as the microwave heating source, but there are no limitations on the microwave oscillation principle or method, such as a microwave oscillator. Multiple heating sources may also be provided.

In this embodiment 1, the "third heating means" HM3 is called "third" to indicate the difference from the second heating means HM2, but does not imply a superiority/inferiority relationship.
In addition, in embodiment 1, a heat source using a radiant electric heat source (such as a sheath heater, mica heater, carbon heater, ceramic heater, infrared heater, radiant heater, etc.) is used, but a heat source that generates heat in other forms or methods may also be used.

The third heating means HM3 refers to a means capable of cooking in one heating chamber 6. It may be a form in which multiple heating sources with different heating principles are used in combination, such as a heating source composed of an electric heater and a gas burner (burner). An induction heating source may also be used as a heating source for heating the heating chamber 6. It may also be a steam generator 550 (boiler) (not shown) that supplies high-temperature steam (such as superheated steam).

Furthermore, the third heating means may be either a heat source that heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 6 from the outside, or a heat source that is installed in the internal space of the heating chamber 6 and heats the atmosphere in the internal space to a high temperature.
In addition, a heat-generating member that becomes hot by induction heating may be placed in the heating chamber, and this heat-generating member may heat the wall surface of the heating chamber 6 from the outside, or may heat the air inside the heating chamber 6.

A representative example of the induction heating coil (IH coil) referred to in this embodiment 1 is one formed by bundling about 30 thin copper or aluminum wires of about 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm, twisting several of these bundles together and winding them into a spiral shape. Alternatively, there is also one formed by winding about 1,000 to 1,500 wires of about 0.05 mm. There has also been a proposal to form the coil from a ring-shaped conductor made of a flat conductive material.
Any of these forms corresponds to an "IH coil" which is the main part of an induction heating source.

In this embodiment 1, the "cooking mode" refers to a form of heat cooking. In this embodiment 1, there are three types of cooking modes. The first is the "cooperative cooking mode," the second is the "combined cooking mode," and the third is the "single cooking mode."

In this embodiment 1, "coordinated cooking" refers to cooking that uses two or more heating sources that heat a single cooking object (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) in different locations and whose heating operation conditions can be set independently.

The above-mentioned "coordinated cooking" refers to the use of multiple heating means with a time lag. For example, in the process of completing a single dish, after preheating with a microwave heating source, the food to be cooked is moved to another location, where it is heated with an induction coil to complete the dish, which is a type of "coordinated cooking" as referred to here.

Another type of "cooperative cooking" is to heat the food inside the heating chamber 6 with a gas burner (burner), and then move the food onto the top plate 3 and heat it with the gas burner (burner) or an induction heating source to improve the cooking quality.

The "voice input mode" refers to a control mode in which the user US inputs by speaking, without touching or pressing the buttons or operation surfaces of the input switches (input keys).
The types of "voice input mode" include "voice input mode 1" and "voice input mode 2".

The "voice input mode 1" is selected by operating an input key (hereinafter referred to as a "combined key") that supports both voice input and touch (including pressing) input.
The "voice input mode 2" is selected by operating an input key 180 dedicated to voice input (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "voice input dedicated key").

When an input operation unit has multiple input keys, including the "dual-purpose key," and the mode is changed to "voice input mode 1" by the dual-purpose key (e.g., input key 107 in central operation unit 15M), there are two cases: the input functions of (some of) the input keys other than the dual-purpose key (e.g., input keys 108 and 109 in central operation unit 15M) are temporarily disabled (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 1A"), and the input functions are not disabled (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 1B"). Either case corresponds to "voice input mode 1" as defined here.

When the "dedicated voice input key" 180 is pressed during touch input using an input key (e.g., 107 or 108) in one input operation unit, "voice input mode 2" is selected. In this case, after the selection of voice input mode 2, there are two cases: one in which the input functions of (some of) the input keys (e.g., 107, 108) other than the dedicated voice input key 180 are temporarily disabled (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 2A"), and one in which they are not disabled (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 2B"). Either case corresponds to "voice input mode 2" as referred to here.

"Recipe data" CD refers to data used in controlling the cooker 1 to cook one food item.
One form of recipe data CD includes data specifying the heating means, data specifying the heating process and order, and control conditions during heating (including, but not limited to, command data and programs such as heat, target temperature, and heating and cooking time).

Another form of the recipe data CD does not include data specifying a heating means or data defining the heating steps or order, but includes only a portion of the data required to execute a cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak).
For example, when cooking in the collaborative cooking mode described below, it does not include information specific to the heating means that executes one cooking menu (including information indicating the attributes of the heating means and information about the heating port, etc.), information about the cooking process, information indicating the order in which the heating means are driven, etc.
In this case, the data mainly consists of instructions and data (described in detail later, referred to as "commands" or "command data") that determine control conditions such as heating capacity and heating time. In this case, if the recipe data CD held by the cooking device 1 is configured on the premise of, for example, one serving of food to be cooked, the cooking device may be adapted to two or four servings, etc., by changing the control conditions (for example, one parameter called heating time) by a built-in program in response to an external command.

In the following embodiments, no special distinction will be made between the types of recipe data described above.

Embodiment 1.
(1. Configuration of the Heat Cooking System)
A first embodiment according to the present disclosure is shown in FIGS.
Referring to FIG.
The cooking system of the present embodiment 1 is configured to include a cooking appliance 1, a smartphone 200 having a function of wirelessly communicating with the cooking appliance 1, and a cloud server 300. In addition to a smartphone-type communication terminal, a tablet terminal or a personal computer with a communication function may also be used. These devices and the smartphone 200 are collectively referred to as a "communication terminal" or an "information processing terminal" below, and the reference numeral 200 is used.

The communication terminal 200 performs wireless communication using a communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark) with an access point such as a wireless router 340 (not shown) installed in the house (HA) in which the cooking appliance 1 is used.

The cooking appliance 1 can acquire at least the recipe data CD2 through wireless communication with the communication terminal 200.
In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the recipe data will be distinguished by reference numerals, such as recipe data CD2 and recipe data CD1. The recipe data CD acquired by the cooking appliance 1 from the outside will be referred to as "recipe data CD2".
In contrast, the recipe data CD provided by the recipe data providing server 301, which will be described later, may be referred to as "recipe data CD1." Details will be described later.
The communication terminal 200 performs wireless communication with the cooking appliance 1 using a communication method such as Bluetooth (registered trademark).

The communication terminal 200 can be connected to a home gateway 411 installed in a house HA via the router 340 (not shown). NW is a network that constitutes a wide area communication network such as the Internet.
In addition, the cloud server 300 in the external space includes at least one recipe data providing server 301 and the external server 417 .

The recipe data providing server 301 is equipped with a recipe DB (database) 302 (not shown) that holds data on recipes for performing various cooking methods, and the communication terminal 200 accesses the recipe DB (302: not shown) operated by the recipe data providing server 301 and acquires (downloads) various recipe data CD1 from the recipe DB.

The recipe data CD (CD1, CD2) includes commands (command data) that specify the heating means and control conditions (including, but not limited to, at least one of heat, heating time, temperature, etc.) so that a specific food item can be cooked in the cooking device 1.

In the following explanation, recipe data (cooking condition data) may be described with reference numbers such as CD1, CD2, etc., but the contents of the recipe data do not necessarily differ depending on the reference number, and may even be the same. These reference numbers (CD1, CD2) are used based on the sender of the recipe data to make it easier to understand. When using a unified reference number for recipe data, "CD" is used. Also, the name "recipe data" will be used for the explanation.

The cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 1 includes a first heating means HM1 arranged below a top plate 3 (described in FIG. 2 and subsequent figures) that covers the upper surface of the cooking device 1, a second heating means HM2 that supplies microwaves to the inside of a heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 3) formed inside the cooking device 1, and a third heating means HM3 that is located inside or outside the heating chamber 6 and raises the temperature of the internal space of the heating chamber 6 to heat it.

If the upper surface of the top plate 3 is defined as the "first location," then in order to heat the object to be heated (a magnetic metal pan) placed in this first location, an induction heating means is used as the first heating means HM1. Alternatively, a gas combustion device equipped with a gas burner for heating a pan made of magnetic metal or non-magnetic metal can be used as the first heating means HM1.

If a closed space located away from the first location is defined as a "second location," then the interior of the heating chamber 6 (see Figure 3) is the second location.

The cooking device 1 has a function of executing an "independent cooking mode" KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven independently.

The cooking device 1 has a function of executing a "composite cooking mode" KM2 in which the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are driven simultaneously, or one of them is driven first and the other is automatically driven later, as a method of cooking one food item. Even when the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are driven simultaneously, both cases in which the heating ends at the same time and cases in which they end at different times are one operation pattern belonging to the "composite cooking mode" KM2.

The "combined cooking mode" KM2 has at least a pattern (RG control mode 1) in which the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are driven simultaneously from the beginning, a pattern (RG control mode 2) in which the third heating means HM3 starts to be driven after the second heating means HM2, and a pattern (RG control mode 3) in which the third heating means HM3 is driven first and then automatically switched to the second heating means HM3. In these RG control modes 1 to 3, switching between the heating means is automatically performed when cooking begins in the heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 9).

The "composite cooking mode" KM2, unlike the linked cooking mode KM1, does not have a "cooking menu" corresponding to a specific food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak). In other words, it provides a "control menu" for each pattern for driving the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3.

For example, one of the "control menus" is the "RG control mode 1." In the RG control mode (RG composite cooking mode), various foods can be cooked. One of the "control menus," for example, the "RG control mode 1," is controlled by recipe data that defines the control mode, but is not set for each specific food to be cooked.

In other words, the operation pattern in which two or more heating sources (the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3) are operated in a predetermined sequence is the composite cooking mode KM2, which has multiple "control menus."

In contrast to this, the cooperative cooking mode KM1 having a cooperative cooking menu applies recipe data (corresponding to specific foods) to heat and cook foods placed inside the heating chamber 6 and above the top plate 3 in a predetermined order.
In other words, the contents of the recipe data are different between the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

In the following description, when a type of control mode, such as a driving pattern of a heat source, is indicated, it is called a "control menu." For example, "thawing" is one of the control menus.
On the other hand, when specifying foods that can be cooked by heating, names of dishes, etc., they are called "cooking menus." For example, "hamburger steak" is one of the cooking menus.

The cooking device 1 has a function of executing a "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven with a time difference determined depending on the operation of the user US (user).

The "combined cooking mode" KM3 has a pattern in which cooking process 1 is performed by the first heating means HM1, and a pattern in which cooking process 1 is performed by the second heating means HM2.
For example, in order to move on to cooking process 2 after completing cooking process 1 using the first heating means HM1, the food to be cooked is moved into the heating chamber 6, and then operation of the second heating means HM2 is started. Therefore, between cooking process 1 and cooking process 2, there is a "heating pause period" (transition period TR) during which no heating operation is performed.

In this "cooperative cooking mode" KM3, the recipe data CD is prepared for each specific food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak, roast beef, gratin).
The recipe data CD specifies the heating means to be used, the order in which the heating means are driven, and the control conditions for the heating means (including at least one of heating power, heating time, temperature, etc.).

The recipe data CD is stored in both the cooking appliance 1 and the recipe DB 302. The type of recipe data CD in the recipe DB and the type of recipe data CD stored in the cooking appliance 1 do not have to be the same. For example, the recipe DB 302 may be configured such that new recipe data CD for the linked cooking mode KM1 is added sequentially, and the recipe data CD for the composite cooking menu is accumulated sequentially.

When the cooking appliance 1 acquires the recipe data CD for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM1 from the communication terminal 200, the data is one cooking menu unit selected by the user US on the communication terminal 200. This is not limited to the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3, but is also common to the "combined cooking mode" KM2 and the "single cooking mode" KM1.

As described above, the communication terminal 200 requests the recipe data providing server 301 to provide recipe data CD for the desired food to be cooked, and downloads the recipe data CD1 corresponding to the desired recipe.

The communication terminal 200 can transmit recipe data CD2 corresponding to one recipe acquired from the recipe data providing server 301 to the cooking appliance 1.
In order to utilize such recipe data acquisition function, a user US of the cooking appliance 1 accesses a recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) and installs an application for recipe selection (hereinafter referred to as the “recipe selection app”) on the communication terminal 200.

When the user US installs the recipe selection app, the user US performs an operation to register identification information, such as the model name of the cooking appliance, as the initial setting. This registration allows the user US to obtain recipe data CD corresponding to the rated specifications of the cooking appliance 1 (such as the heating capacity of each of the heating means HM1 to HM3) from the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301).

The user US also uses the recipe selection app to pair the communication terminal 200 with the cooking appliance 1, and establishes wireless communication between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking appliance 1. Note that this wireless communication may be performed using a near field communication (NFC) method.

To use the recipe data CD acquisition function, the user US of the cooking appliance 1 accesses the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) and installs in advance an application for selecting recipes (hereinafter referred to as the "recipe selection application") in the cooking appliance 1. It is convenient to make this installation possible to be easily executed on the cooking appliance 1 as one menu of the "function setting mode" using the input keys 115 described below.

When the user US installs the recipe selection app, the user US performs an operation to register identification information, such as the model name of the cooking appliance, as an initial setting. This registration allows the user US to obtain recipe data CD corresponding to the specifications of the cooking appliance 1 (such as the heating capacity of each of the heating means HM1 to HM3) from the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301).

In the first embodiment, the recipe data CD may be described as being "acquired" or "restricted from being acquired." This point will be described.
The explanation of "restricting acquisition" does not mean that recipe data (specific information constituting all or a part of it) CD from the outside cannot enter the inside of the cooking appliance 1 at all via the communication unit 51 described later. In the cooking appliance 1, the communication unit 51 once receives the recipe data CD from the outside and temporarily stores it in an appropriate storage area in the storage device 41 (described in FIG. 8). At that time, the contents of the data (attributes, presence or absence of identification information 167, etc.) are analyzed. However, if the data is data transmitted from the outside during the "period during which acquisition is restricted" as described above, it will not be used in the subsequent process of executing the cooking menu (i.e., the cooking process) and will be automatically erased within a short period of time (at least when the main power switch 20 is turned off).

(2. Configuration of various electrical devices and home gateway)
The "home appliance" 402 refers to an electric appliance designed mainly for use at home. The home appliance 402 includes a cooking device 1, a refrigerator 403, a television receiver 404, an air conditioner 405, an air purifier 406, a ventilation device 407, an electric rice cooker (electric rice cooker) 408, a microwave oven 409, a lighting fixture 410, and an air purifier 413 (not shown). In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the "refrigerator" 403 includes both a refrigerator-freezer with a built-in freezer (freezer compartment) and a freezer with only a freezing function.

The "device identification information" of home appliance 402 is unique information for identifying home appliance 402. Specifically, it is important information required for information communication, such as the MAC address, manufacturer name, type name (model name), model number, and serial number of home appliance 402.

The "home gateway" 411 refers to an information collection device or information processing device that relays information between two or more home appliances 402 in one home and allows them to operate in cooperation with each other. In addition, the home gateway 411 also performs the operation of giving a command signal to one home appliance 402 or acquiring information (also called "data") from one home appliance 402.
In the following description, it is assumed that the home gateway 411 is one form of the information processing device 411 .

The home gateway 411 may have a power control function such as a peak cut function to manage the total power usage of a household for all or some of the home appliances 402, in which case it may be called a "power control device" or "integrated management device", etc.

The home gateway 411 has a function of acquiring information on the current state of the home appliance 402, such as whether the home appliance 402 is operating, stopped, or in standby mode, from the home appliance 402 via wired or wireless signals.
When wireless communication is used, the home gateway 411 is connected to the target home appliance 402 using the appliance identification information.

Even if the home gateway 411 functions as an "integrated management device" or "power command device" for one home appliance (e.g., cooking appliance 1) 402, if it does not limit the power consumption of other home appliances (e.g., lighting fixture 410), it does not correspond to an "integrated management device" or "power command device". For example, even if the home gateway 411 acquires the operation information of the lighting fixture 410, it does not have the function of regulating the power consumption of the lighting fixture 410 itself so that the total power consumption, including the power consumption of the other home appliances 402, does not exceed the upper limit of the specified total power consumption. In such a case, the home gateway 411 does not correspond to an integrated management device or power command device from the perspective of the lighting fixture 410.

In FIG. 1, the inside of one house HA is divided into multiple living spaces by walls and doors, which are not actually shown, and one of these living spaces, the kitchen 601, contains home appliances 402 such as the refrigerator 403, cooking appliance 1, microwave oven 409, and electric rice cooker 408, as well as kitchen furniture 600. Note that the living space also includes other rooms, such as a "living room" and a "bathroom," as well as a room with a toilet, which are not shown in FIG. 1. The living space may include other rooms.

All living spaces are supplied with electricity, for example 200V, from a commercial power source EP provided by an electric power company outside the house. This electricity is drawn into the house HA via a watt-hour meter 414.

415 is a power line (main line) connected to a commercial power source EP with a voltage of 200 V via a breaker BK. The aforementioned television receiver 404, air conditioner 405, lighting fixture 410, cooking device 1, microwave oven 409, electric rice cooker 408, home gateway 411, and environment detection unit 416 (not shown) are each connected to this power line 415.

FIG. 1 will now be described.
The external server 417 may be, for example, a server installed by an external organization such as an earthquake information providing organization or an electric power company in a specific region, or may be a server prepared by the manufacturer of the cooking appliance 1. This external server 417 and the recipe data providing server 301 may be a distributed processing type server known as a "cloud server." It is known that there are three types of "cloud computing" that uses cloud servers: "IaaS,""PaaS," and "SaaS."

The home gateway 411 can receive various content distribution services from an external server 417. This content includes CDs containing recipe data (text and images) for various cooking methods.

The external server 417 functions as an information providing means for the home appliance 402. In other words, the external server 417 may be installed by an organization such as the manufacturer, distributor, repairer, or information service provider of the home appliance 402, either alone or in collaboration with two or more organizations, and provides various services related to the home appliance 402 to the user US via the network NW.

The external server 417 may also be what is generally called a "Web server" (hereinafter referred to as a "Web server"). A Web server refers to a service program that provides display information of HTML and objects (images, etc.) to a Web browser of software on the information processing device (client) side that "receives information," such as various communication terminals 200 and the home gateway 411, in accordance with HTTP (a protocol used to exchange data such as HTML documents and images between Web servers and Web browsers), and a server computer on which the service runs.

The external server 417 stores and remembers control application software that enables remote control of the home gateway 411 from the house HA or a remote location. The communication terminal 200, which will be described in detail later, for example a device known as a smartphone, can access the external server 417 and download (read) the control application software, thereby achieving the remote control described above.

The communication terminal 200 can be easily carried by the user US to communicate calls and data (including e-mail information) indoors, outdoors, or anywhere on the go. It is a device that can download information from outdoor information sites via a network (wide area communication circuit network) NW, send and receive e-mail, and transmit remote control signals, but it can also be a device that cannot make calls, and such portable communication terminal devices are collectively called communication terminal 200.

The communication terminal 200 in the present embodiment 1 has a function of transmitting and receiving signals through short-range communication while being in close proximity (or in contact) with the input/output unit of each home appliance 402 within a few centimeters. Note that this short-range communication is an international standard technology for wireless communication known as Near Field Communication (abbreviation: NFC).

In this NFC communication, a so-called wireless tag (NFC tag) is embedded in the home appliance 402 including the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 403 .
On the other hand, it is also possible for communication terminal 200 to send control data (also called a "control command") to an NFC storage unit of home appliance 402, and control home appliance 402 in accordance with the control command.

In this embodiment 1, direct remote control of the home appliances 402 from the communication terminal 200 is not possible. Some of the home appliances 402, such as the cooking appliance 1, generate high heat, so remote control via the Internet, which is used by many people from outside the house HA, is not adopted. Instead, it is possible to operate all the home appliances 400 via the home gateway 411 as an integrated information processing device.

As is clear from the above description, the home gateway 411 in this embodiment 1 is an information processing device that relays information between two or more home appliances 400 in one home and allows them to operate in coordination. In addition to this, it also performs the operation of giving a command signal to one home appliance 400 or acquiring information (also called data) from one home appliance 400.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, the kitchen 601 in the house HA is equipped with a range hood 407, which is a type of ventilation device described below, and a ceiling-embedded air purifier 413.

416A and 416B are sensor units of the environment detection unit 416 (not shown) of the home gateway 411. One sensor unit 416A, as shown in FIG. 1, is placed inside the kitchen 601 as a human presence sensor that detects the presence of people (by infrared rays or ultrasonic waves). The other sensor unit 416B is similarly installed in a different location from the sensor unit 416B. The sensor unit 416B is for acquiring "environmental information." The function of the environment detection unit 416 will be explained in detail later.

The "environmental information" refers to a total of four types of information: temperature information on the atmosphere in the space (kitchen 601) where the cooker 1 and refrigerator 403 are used, dust dispersion amount information, light amount information, and information indicating the amount of carbon dioxide. The dust dispersion amount information is the result of measuring the amount of dust (including pollen) present in the air.

Examples of "use of environmental information" include the following:
(1) When the temperature is high, the keep-warm function of the electric rice cooker 408 is operated continuously after the rice cooking process ends. Also, the target refrigeration temperature and the target freezing temperature of the refrigerator 403 are raised above the standard values.
(2) When the humidity is high, the air conditioner 405 is operated in the "dehumidification mode" or "cooling mode", or the ventilation device 407 is started. Alternatively, if the air conditioner 405 is in operation, the operating conditions (such as the target room temperature) are changed.
(3) When fine dust particles are dispersed in the air, the air cleaner 413 is operated, or the ventilation device 407 is started.
(4) When the amount of pollen dispersed is large, the air purifier 413 is started to operate.
(5) When the amount of light (amount of visible light) is low, the lighting device 410 is turned on.

A "resident" refers to a person who resides in a single house HA. Residents include blood relatives such as parents and children, brothers, and sisters. When using home appliance 402, a resident is called a "user US."

"Home" means a single dwelling HA managed by a specific manager, and may also include an apartment building with multiple rooms and occupied by multiple families. In other words, such an apartment building is considered a home here if, like a single dwelling HA, the commercial power limit is centrally managed by a single power cut-off device (such as a single breaker BK or multiple power cut-off devices).

"Power limit information on the home appliance side" refers to information on some signal related to power consumption that the home appliance 402 receives from the home gateway 411. This "power limit information on the home appliance side" refers to information that includes information on transmission commands such as the power reduction request signal AS1, the power reduction command signal AS2, etc. This information includes information indicating the time when the signal was received (year, month, and time in seconds) and the meaning of the signal. For example, information such as "Reception time: 17:00 on March 20, 2022, reduce the instantaneous maximum power consumption by 2%" regarding the power reduction command signal AS2 for the cooking appliance 1 at a certain point in time.

In the case of the cooking appliance 1, for example, the power limit information on the home appliance side is stored in chronological order in the storage device 41 of the control device 40, which will be described later, and is not erased even when the main power switch 20 is turned ON or OFF. Turning the main power switch 20 ON and OFF is considered to be one cooking session, and at least several cooking sessions are stored and held. Anything beyond that is automatically erased in sequence.

In FIG. 1, the refrigerator 403 has a "storage compartment" 403H for storing ingredients (hereinafter referred to as "food ingredients") for food (including natural foods, processed foods, etc.). The storage compartment 403H includes the freezer compartment 403A and the refrigerator compartment 403B, and may be divided into specific compartments such as a "vegetable compartment" and a "compartment dedicated to meat and fish" depending on the type of food.

In the following description of this embodiment 1, it is assumed that the storage chamber 403H is provided with at least two types of chambers: a freezer chamber 403A and a refrigerator chamber 403B which is a space independent of the freezer chamber 403A. Note that the temperatures (freezer temperature and refrigerator temperature) of the internal spaces of the storage chambers 403H may be collectively referred to as the "internal temperature" below.

The refrigerator 403 has multiple freezer compartments 403A, allowing the user to select a freezer compartment with a suitable freezing temperature (temperature range) for frozen foods (including processed foods) and fresh ingredients (meat, fish, etc.), such as -18°C±2°C, -10°C, or -2°C.

In addition, the freezing temperature and freezing temperature range also affect the maturation of fresh food ingredients (e.g., beef) when stored for a long period of time, so even in the same freezer, the freezing temperature and freezing temperature range can be changed as appropriate depending on the type of food ingredient.

As mentioned above, there are a number of different internal temperatures. For example, a room that is set to a temperature close to the freezing point (freezing temperature) is called a "chilled room."
The volumes and shapes of the multiple storage compartments 403H are different, with the refrigerator compartment 403B being the largest. In order to further divide the inside of the storage compartment 403H into multiple compartments, partitions and lids (or doors) may be provided to increase the independent storage space.

The refrigerator 403 is equipped with, as a cooling device (not shown), an electric compressor 403C, refrigerant piping (not shown), a cold air circulation fan (not shown), a damper (shutter) (not shown) that controls the inflow of cold air into the storage chamber 403H, and the like, in order to configure a refrigeration cycle. The temperature inside the refrigerator can be controlled by changing the operating frequency of the electric compressor or by changing the air volume of the cold air circulation fan.

Refrigerator 403 has a display unit (display screen) 403D at the top center of the front (front face) of the door (not shown). Inside the housing of refrigerator 403 are storage device 403M (not shown) such as a semiconductor memory, and control device 403U (not shown) mainly consisting of a microcomputer. The control device 403U issues command signals to the drive circuit (inverter circuit, not shown) of electric compressor 403C, the cool air circulation fan (not shown), the damper (not shown), etc. The control device 403U has a control program (not shown) for controlling the operation of refrigerator 403 as a whole.

The wireless communication unit 403T (not shown) installed inside the refrigerator 403 or on the ceiling outside the refrigerator 403 is controlled by the control device 403U (not shown). The wireless communication unit 403T can wirelessly communicate with the communication unit of the home gateway 411.

Due to the above-mentioned configuration, the refrigerator 403 is capable of wireless communication with the cooking appliance 1 via the home gateway 411 and can also be connected to the network NW, so that it can obtain various information and data (including the "recipe data CD" described later) of the cooking appliance 1.
Furthermore, refrigerator 403 can also transmit and receive data to and from communication terminal 200 via wireless communication.

When a Peltier element is used as the cooling device for the storage room 403H, the temperature inside the refrigerator can be adjusted by adjusting the power supplied to the Peltier element. The refrigerator 403 may also use both an electric compressor 403C and a Peltier element.

Furthermore, a weight sensor (not shown) for storing specific food ingredients (e.g., eggs, milk, butter, etc.) and measuring their weight may be placed in storage room 403H. Weight measurements by the weight sensor may be performed periodically, and the data may be collected by refrigerator 403's control device 403U (not shown). Such weight data may become part of the refrigerator 403's inventory data, and is used when the home gateway 411, which is a type of information processing device, queries the inventory data.

The management database held by the memory unit 403M of the control device 403U of the refrigerator 403 holds the internal temperature (standard value, adjustable temperature range, and minimum adjustable temperature range) of each storage compartment 403H, its volume, and identification information such as the type and name of the main target foodstuff. For example, the freezer compartment 403A holds information such as the standard internal temperature being -10°C, the range being -5°C to -15°C and being adjustable in 20 steps, and the volume being 30 liters. In addition, the maximum dimension (internal dimension) data of the storage compartment 403H may be held. This is because it is used to determine whether solid objects such as pots can be stored as is. The refrigerator 403 can provide all of this data to the outside when responding to an inventory data inquiry from the home gateway 411. In other words, the home gateway 411 can also obtain various data of the storage compartment 403H each time.

(3. Configuration of Cooking Device)
The configuration of the cooking device 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.
Cooking appliance 1 is installed in kitchen furniture 600. Reference numeral 6 denotes a heating chamber formed inside cooking appliance 1, and reference numeral 7 denotes a door that covers a front opening of heating chamber 113 in an openable and closable manner.

The cooking device 1 has a top plate 3 that covers the upper surface thereof, on which an object to be heated N (such as a pot made of magnetic metal) is placed, and the object is induction heated by IH coils 9 (9C, 9L, 9R). 32 denotes a bottom wall surface that divides the inside of the cooking device 1 into two independent spaces, an upper space and an lower space.
Reference numeral 33 denotes an installation space located above the bottom wall surface 32 inside the cooking appliance 1, in which the IH coil 9 is housed.

As is clear from Figures 2 and 3, the cooking device 1 is a built-in type induction cooking heater that is incorporated into kitchen furniture 600 that has a cooking counter on top. The top plate 3 is exposed on the kitchen countertop that constitutes the top surface of the kitchen furniture 600. 600D is a water supply inlet installed in the kitchen furniture 600.

The top plate 3 is composed of, for example, a heat-resistant glass plate and a metal frame attached around the glass plate. Three heating ports 4 are provided on the upper surface of the top plate 3: a left heating port 4L, a right heating port 4R, and a central heating port 4C.

The left heating port 4L, the right heating port 4R, and the central heating port 4C indicate the area where a metal cooking container such as a pot or frying pan (also referred to as the "heated object" N for the first heating means HM1) is placed. Guide marks (not shown) that serve as guides for placing the heated object are printed on the upper surface of the top plate 3 for the left heating port 4L, the right heating port 4R, and the central heating port 4C.

An exhaust port cover 5 is provided on the rear side (rear side) of the top plate 3. The exhaust port cover 5 is made of a punched metal or lattice-shaped metal member with numerous small through holes, and is breathable throughout with little air resistance. Exhaust air released from inside the cooking appliance 1 passes through the exhaust port cover 5 and exits the cooking appliance 1.

A door (heating door) 7 is provided on the front of the main body 2 of the cooking device 1 to open and close the front opening of the heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 3) located inside the main body 2. The door 7 is provided with a handle 8 for opening and closing it.

Figure 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment, seen from the side. As shown in Figure 3, an induction heating coil 9L (hereinafter referred to as the "left IH coil") is provided below the left heating port 4L as a left induction heating means.

Similarly, an induction heating coil 9R (hereinafter referred to as the "right IH coil") is provided below the right heating port 4R as a right induction heating means, and an induction heating coil 9C (hereinafter referred to as the "central IH coil") is provided below the central heating port 4C as a central induction heating means.

These IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R are circular heating coils made by winding thin conductors such as copper or aluminum wires, and generate a high-frequency magnetic field when a high-frequency current is supplied to them. This causes induction heating of the cooking vessels (objects to be heated N) placed over the left heating port 4L, right heating port 4R, and center heating port 4C.

The heating means including the IH coils 9C, 9L, 9R and their drive circuits (high frequency power supply circuits such as inverter circuits, not shown) may be referred to as the induction heating source or first heating means HM1. In the following explanation, unless there is a particular contradiction, the "first heating means" HM1 will be used. Note that when one heating means (heating source) shares a drive circuit or the like with another heating means (heating source), there are two heating means referred to here.

A temperature sensor group 30 (see FIG. 9) consisting of multiple temperature sensors (not shown) is mounted near the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R to detect the temperature of the top plate 3 and cooking vessel (heated object N). One temperature sensor 30A (not shown) constitutes one sensor in the temperature sensor group 30. The temperature sensor here may be either or both of a contact type temperature sensor such as a thermistor and a non-contact type temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor.

The heating chamber 6 is provided inside the main body 2, below the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R. The heating chamber 6 is surrounded by a metal wall such as stainless steel, and is a space for heating the food (foodstuffs, ingredients) contained within the heating chamber 6.

The food to be cooked may be placed on a heat-resistant plastic container, a porcelain or heat-resistant glass dish, or may be placed inside a container and placed in the heating chamber 6, in which case the dish or container may be called the "heated container." However, since these containers are not induction heated by the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R, even if they are placed on the heating port 4 of the top plate 3, they are not called the "heated food" N of the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R.

A horizontally long rectangular opening (not shown) is formed in the front of the heating chamber 6 for inserting and removing the food to be cooked. The opening in the front of the heating chamber 6 is covered by a door 7 that can be opened and closed freely. The door 7 is supported by the main body 2 so that it can rotate freely via a hinge and an arm (not shown). This allows the door 7 to open forward to a horizontal position with its lower end as the fulcrum (center of rotation). The door 7 may be pulled forward integrally with a support member (a structure such as a shelf, not shown) that supports the heated container from below, by a slide rail (not shown).

The door 7 is provided with an opening/closing detector 10 for detecting whether the door 7 is open or closed. The opening/closing detector 10 is, for example, a microswitch or an infrared sensor. A microwave oscillator 11 is provided behind the heating chamber 6 to heat the food placed in the heating chamber 6. The microwave oscillator 11 is, for example, composed of a magnetron, and irradiates microwaves into the heating chamber 6 to heat the food placed in the heating chamber, which is known as range heating.

The heating means including the microwave oscillator 11 and its drive circuit (a high-frequency power supply circuit such as an inverter circuit, not shown) may be referred to as the second heating means HM2.

The heating chamber 6 is also provided with an upper radiant heat heating means 12a and a lower radiant heat heating means 12b, which heat the food from above and below using so-called heaters. The upper radiant heat heating means 12a is located on the outer or inner ceiling wall surface of the heating chamber 6, and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b is located on the inner or outer wall surface of the heating chamber 6, and both are sheath heaters.

Other types of radiant heat heating means (e.g., mica heaters, carbon heaters, etc.) may be installed outside the heating chamber 6. Figure 3 shows an example in which the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b are both installed in close contact with the outer wall surface of the heating chamber 6.

The heating means including the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b and their drive circuits (not shown) may be referred to as the third heating means HM3. The upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b may be collectively referred to as the "radiant heat heating means", in which case the reference number "12" is used.

The heating chamber 6 is also provided with an infrared sensor 13 as a non-contact temperature sensor to detect the temperature of the food inside the heating chamber 6 without contact. The temperature range detected by this infrared sensor 13 is set to, for example, -20°C to 100°C. This allows the degree of heating of the food to be detected in real time with high accuracy, for example in 1°C increments. This infrared sensor 13 also constitutes one sensor in the group of temperature sensors 30 (see Figure 16).

The heating chamber 6 is also provided with a contact-type temperature sensor (e.g., a thermistor sensor) 14, which is an interior temperature sensor that detects the ambient temperature inside the heating chamber 6 or the wall temperature of the heating chamber 6.

The thermistor sensor 14 detects temperature by detecting changes in electrical resistance, and therefore the upper limit of the temperature it can detect is approximately 250°C. This thermistor sensor 14 constitutes one of the temperature sensors 30. The thermistor sensor 14 may be installed in two locations, near the bottom and ceiling of the heating chamber 6, as shown in Figure 3.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
Fig. 4 is a top view of the cooking appliance 1 according to the embodiment 1. As shown in Fig. 4, a left operation unit 15L, a central operation unit 15M, and a right operation unit 15R are provided on the front side of the upper surface of the top plate 3 of the cooking appliance 1. These three operation units may be collectively referred to as "input operation units", in which case the reference numeral 15 is used.

The central operation unit 15M is used for cooking in the coordinated cooking mode and the combined cooking mode using the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, and therefore may be called a "shared operation unit."
The left operation section 15L may be referred to as a "first operation section," and the right operation section 15R may be referred to as a "second operation section."

A left display unit 16L, a central display unit 16M, a right display unit 16R, a left auxiliary display unit 16L, and a right auxiliary display unit 16R are provided at the rear (rear) of the left operation unit 15L, the central operation unit (shared operation unit) 15M, and the right operation unit 15R.

The left display unit 16L, the center display unit 16M, and the right display unit 16R may be collectively referred to as the "display unit", in which case the reference number 16 is used. Note that all three display units 16L, 16M, and 16R have a horizontally long liquid crystal display screen.

The left auxiliary display unit 17L and the right auxiliary display unit 17R display the heat level using light-emitting elements (LEDs, etc.) and are not equipped with a display screen.
When preheat cooking is selected for the left heating port 4L, the left auxiliary display unit 17L displays an automatically set temperature (default temperature) or the current temperature. The automatically set temperature (default temperature) refers to the target temperature of the bottom surface of an object to be heated (e.g., a metal pan) N when the object is heated at the left heating port 4L. The default temperature can be arbitrarily changed within a certain range by the user US. When timer cooking is set, the time is displayed, and the remaining time and elapsed time can be displayed in a timely manner according to the progress of cooking.

The left auxiliary display unit 17L is composed of multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs) arranged in a horizontal line, and displays the heat of the left heating port 4L in multiple stages. The left auxiliary display unit 17L expresses the heat by switching the lighting state (on, off, blinking, etc.) of the multiple LEDs or by switching the lighting color. This allows the user US to be informed of the heat in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner.

The right auxiliary display unit 17R has basically the same configuration as the left auxiliary display unit 17L, and when preheat cooking is selected using the right heating port 4R, it displays the automatically set temperature (default temperature) or the current temperature.

The left auxiliary display unit 17L and the right auxiliary display unit 17R display the set time for "timer cooking" for the heated object N placed on the left heating port 4L or the right heating port 4R, and in the case of timer cooking, the elapsed time since the heating operation at the left heating port 4L or the right heating port 4R started, or the remaining time until the timer set time ends.

The central heating status display 17M displays the high temperature status of the three heating ports 4L, 4C, and 4R, and is described in detail in Figure 5.

The left heating power display unit 17L, the right heating power display unit 17R, and the center heating status display unit 17M may be collectively referred to as the "auxiliary display units", in which case the reference number 17 will be used.

Also, adjacent to the right operation unit 15R is provided an operation button (key) 20A for the main power switch 20 (see FIG. 9). The main power switch 20 turns the main power supply of the cooking device 1 on and off. The button (key) that is pressed to switch the power supply on and off is the operation button 20A.

When the main power supply of the cooking device 1 is OFF, pressing the operation button 20A for, for example, a few seconds turns the main power supply ON. Also, when the main power supply of the cooking device 1 is ON, pressing the operation button 20A for, for example, a few seconds turns the main power supply OFF.

In FIG. 4, 180 is a (dedicated) input key 180 for selecting the voice input mode located in the central operation section 15M of the input operation section 15. This input key 180 may be a mechanical switch, or may be an input key of a touch input switch like the input keys 107 to 109 described later.

When the input key 180 for selecting this voice input is pressed once, the next input can be made by voice.
When this input key 180 is pressed, the state is switched to "voice input mode 2."
However, this input key 180 cannot select the heating means or the heating port (first heating means HM1) by voice.

Therefore, the input key 180 must be operated after, for example, touching the heating port 4C with the input key on the left operation unit 15L. In other words, if the input key on the left operation unit 15L is "pressed and held," it can be switched to voice input mode 2, but if it is "pressed and held" but "shortly pressed," pressing the input key 180 afterwards will switch to voice input mode 2 from that point on.

Next, a description will be given of Fig. 5. Fig. 5 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement and operation of the central input operation section 15M, the central display section 16M, and the central heating status display section 17M.
The input keys 107, 108, and 109 of the central operation section 16M are shown diagrammatically by dashed dotted lines so that their positional relationship on the central display section 16M can be seen.
The state shown in FIG. 5 shows the display screen before the main power switch 20 is turned on.

In FIG. 5, the central display unit 16M displays information and warnings about the entire cooking device 1, and is composed of a liquid crystal display. The display screen of the central display unit 16M displays the selection result of the induction heating means (first heating means) HM1, the microwave heating means (second heating means) HM2, and the radiant heat heating means (third heating means) HM3, the operating status of each heating means, and caution information or warning information regarding cooking with each heating means.

The central display unit 16M is a single LCD display in terms of hardware, but as shown in FIG. 5, it has three display areas: a first display area 22 on the left, a second display area 23 in the center left and right, and a third display area 24 on the right, and it is possible to display different things in each display area.

The three display areas 22 to 24 may also be linked together as appropriate to form a single (large-area) display area depending on the display situation, and may display one or more purposes. In the following, the first display area 22 will be referred to as the first area (left display area) 22. The second display area 23 will be referred to as the second area (center display area) 23. The third display area 24 will be referred to as the third area (right display area) 24.

The central heating status display section 17M is divided into two sections in the front-to-rear direction, and the lower section (front side) has a range light-emitting element (LED) 310 behind the section displaying the text "range", a grill light-emitting element (LED) 311 behind the section displaying the text "grill", an oven light-emitting element (LED) 312 behind the section displaying the text "oven", and a central IH light-emitting element (LED) 313 behind the section displaying the text "central IH". The light-emitting elements 310 to 313 are arranged below the top plate 3.

At the top (rear) are warning letters saying "Caution: High Temperature" and a group of high temperature warning light emitting diodes (LEDs) 314 arranged in front and below a diagram that typically represents the heating chamber 6 and the three heating ports 4L, 4C, and 4R.

The high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) group 314 is composed of a heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314a and an IH high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314b arranged on the left and right.

The heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314a lights up when the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is high, for example, 50° C. or higher.
The IH high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314b lights up when any of the left IH coil 9L, right IH coil 9R, and center IH coil 9C is operating or when the temperature of the top plate 3 is high, for example, 50° C. or higher.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the central display unit 16M and the arrangement of the central operation unit 15M.
The input keys 107, 108, and 109 of the central operation section 16M are shown diagrammatically by dashed lines so that their positional relationship with the central display section 16M can be seen.

6 is a display example of the second specific screen 16M2 when the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected. Display information (identification information) 160 for identifying the control menu of "Microwave Manual" which is one of the control menus belonging to the composite cooking mode KM2 is displayed in the center of the first area 22 in the front-rear direction.
When the input key 107 described later is touched, the "Microwave Manual" control menu moves backward. At the same time, the display information 162 of "Pre-boil leafy vegetables" displayed in the front is displayed in the center. 161 is the display information of "Warm" which is one of the control menus.

In addition, when such a control menu is selected, the input key 107 does not function as a "voice input switching key" (described later), so the input function does not change between a "short press" and a "long press" (described later). In response to one touch, the control menus displayed in the first area 22 are updated one by one in sequence.

In this way, the user US can select a specific control menu (e.g., "Manual Range") from the "Control Menu" by operating the input key 107.

The "manual range" control menu originally belongs to the "single cooking mode KM1" which uses only the second heating means HM2, but in addition to this, the control menus (for combined cooking) belonging to the "combined cooking mode M2" and the "linked cooking mode KM3" respectively, as well as the control menus and linked cooking menus (for example, "hamburger steak") belonging to linked cooking menus are also displayed in the first area 22.

As shown in Fig. 6, in the combined cooking mode KM2, the wattage (microwave output value) ("500W" in Fig. 6) is displayed in the second area 23. If one wishes to change this wattage, one can touch the input key 108 described below. For example, the wattage can be changed to "600W" or, conversely, to "200W", but there is a limit to the wattage that can be selected.
34 W is heating intensity information indicating the amount of power consumed during heating and the amount of microwave output, etc.

By operating the input keys 108, the user US can select the wattage (microwave output value) for range cooking performed in the heating chamber 6 (a type of "single cooking mode M3" using the microwave oscillator 11).

As shown in FIG. 6, in the combined cooking mode KM2, the heating operation time (set time) is displayed in the third area 24. This heating operation time can be changed by touching the input key 109 described in FIG. 13. For example, the set time for range cooking to be performed in the heating chamber 6 can be selected. 34M is the set time information. Note that 34W is heating intensity information that indicates the amount of power consumption during heating and the amount of microwave output, etc.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
7 is a diagram for explaining the display operation of the central display unit 16M and the arrangement of the central operation unit 15M. In FIG. 7, the input keys 107, 108, and 109 of the central operation unit 16M are shown by dashed lines so that their positional relationship with the central display unit 16M can be seen.

7 is a display example of the first specific screen 16M1 when the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected. The identification information 167 of “hamburger steak”, one of the cooking menus belonging to the cooperative cooking mode KM1, is displayed in the center of the first area 22 in the front-rear direction.
When the input key 107 described later is touched, the cooking menu of "Hamburger" moves backward. At the same time, the identification information 169 of "Roast Beef" displayed in the front is displayed in the center. 168 is the identification information of "Gratin", which is another cooking menu.

In addition, when selecting such a cooking menu, the input key 107 does not function as a "voice input switching key" described below, so the input function does not change between a "short press" and a "long press" described below. With each touch, the cooking menus displayed in the first area 22 are updated one by one in sequence.

In this manner, the user US can select a specific cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") from the "cooking menu" by operating the input keys 107.
In Fig. 7, 170 denotes operation support information. In the example of Fig. 7, it displays "Press the start button to start heating the left IH." This means that by pressing the input key 113 on the central operation unit 15M, induction heating (in the coordinated cooking mode KM1) can be started by the left IH coil 9L. However, in this embodiment 1, it is necessary to press a specific input key on the left operation unit 15L once after pressing the input key 113M.

172 is process information displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 in the linked cooking mode KM1. In the example of FIG. 7, when "hamburger" is selected as the cooking menu, first there is a preheating process with the left IH coil 9L, the first cooking process 1 is heating and cooking with the left IH coil 9L, and the next cooking process 2 is performed by using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) and the oven heating means (third heating means HM3) in combination, and range grill cooking (RG cooking) is performed.

The left display unit 16L and right display unit 16R basically have the same display function as the central display unit 16M, and have a first area 22 to a third area 24, but the only heating sources they correspond to are the left heating port 4L and the right heating port 4R.

The display screens of the central display unit 16M, left display unit 16L, and right display unit 16R are each a single LCD screen in terms of hardware, but are displayed in up to three separate areas, the first area 22 to the third area 24, as described above, by the control display 40 described below or a dedicated drive circuit (not shown).

This method of dividing a single display screen into multiple areas has been proposed, for example, in Japanese Patent Publication No. 5425171 and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-172940, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 8 is a control block diagram showing main functions of the cooking appliance 1 according to the first embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 8, the cooking appliance 1 includes a control device 40 that performs integrated control of the entire cooking appliance 1 .

The control device 40 is an electronic circuit board on which electronic components such as a control circuit that controls the operation of each part of the cooking device 1 are mounted. The control device 40 controls the operation of the left IH coil 9L, the right IH coil 9R, and the center IH coil 9C based on the operation of the left operating unit 15L and the right operating unit 15R, and the temperature of the heated object on the top plate 3.

The control device 40 controls the operation of the central IH coil 9C, the microwave heating means 11, the upper radiant heat heating means 12a, and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b based on the operation of the central operation unit 15M, the temperature of the heated object N on the top plate 3, and the detection results of the infrared sensor 13 and the thermistor sensor 14.

The control device 40 also controls the display of the left display unit 16L, the right display unit 16R, the left heating power display unit 17L, and the right heating power display unit 17R based on the operation of the left operation unit 15L and the right operation unit 15R.

Furthermore, the control device 40 controls the display of the central display unit 16M and the central heating status display unit 17M based on the open signal from the open/close detection unit 10 and the operation of the left operation unit 15L, the right operation unit 15R, and the central operation unit 15M.

The control device 40 has a storage device 41 that stores various programs and parameter data used to control the cooking device 1 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "control data"), and data for the display screens displayed on the display units 16L, 16R, 16M, 17L, and 17R (hereinafter referred to as "display condition data"). The control device 40 also activates the audio notification unit 50 as necessary, and notifies the user US of the operating status of the cooking device 1 by audio.

The control device 40 stores data in a fixed format, such as various programs and information on parameters used in the heating cooking control of the heating control unit 43, in the recipe data storage unit 42 of the storage device 41. This data is the recipe data CD mentioned above. As will be explained later, the cooking device 1 is provided with recipe data CD corresponding to each of the eight cooking menus in the linked cooking mode KM3 from the start.

The "recipe data" CD and "display condition data" can be acquired by the cooking appliance 1 for each individual cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") from an external device such as a communication terminal.

42 is a recipe data storage unit that stores the recipe data CD and the display condition data. The storage unit 42 may constitute one section (area) in the storage device 41, or may be configured as a separate unit from the storage device 41 in terms of hardware.

Reference numeral 43 denotes a heating control section which performs integrated control of the entire heating operation of the cooking device 1 and is mainly composed of a microcomputer.
Reference numeral 53 denotes a data acquisition unit, which acquires the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51. In addition, there are cases where the "display condition data" is acquired from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51 described later.

51 is a communication unit that communicates wirelessly with the outside, and has a function of performing wireless communication with the communication terminal 200 as shown in FIG. 1. It also has a function of connecting to the cloud server 300 via the network NW.

Reference numeral 54 denotes a permission condition determination unit which performs a process of determining whether cooking in the linked cooking mode KM1 or the combined cooking mode KM2 is permitted.
Reference numeral 57 denotes a power supply circuit, which supplies power of a constant voltage to the control device 40. Reference numeral 20 denotes a main power supply switch inserted in this power supply circuit 57.

A limiting section 55 limits the acquisition of the recipe data CD.
The restriction unit 55 has a function of restricting the data acquisition unit 53 from acquiring the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 during the waiting period before starting cooking in the collaborative cooking mode KM1 (i.e., before the “cooking process 1” described below).

Furthermore, the restriction unit 55 has a function of restricting the acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of one cooking menu is completed based on recipe data CD acquired from outside.
The restriction unit 55 may be realized by a single control program of a computer (not shown) constituting the control device 40, and it is not necessarily required that the restriction unit 55 be configured as a separate hardware component from the control device 40.

The input operation unit 15 has a voice signal receiving unit 56 that receives voice uttered by the user US through a microphone (not shown) and converts the voice into a predetermined voice signal.
15R is the right operating section, 15L is the left operating section, and 15M is the central operating section.

On the other hand, the control device 40 is provided with an audio signal analysis unit 58 that receives an audio signal from the audio signal receiving unit 56 and analyzes the content of the audio. The audio signal analysis unit 58 compares the content of the audio received by the audio signal receiving unit 56 with the information in the audio database in the storage device 41, analyzes the content of the audio, and transmits the analysis result to the heating control unit 43.

70 is an input processing unit. Upon receiving an input signal from the input operation unit 15, the input processing unit 70 switches its own input reception mode to "audio input mode 1". It also controls the input signal analysis unit 52, which will be described later. Furthermore, upon receiving the analysis result from the audio signal analysis unit 58, it transmits control data to the heating control unit 43.

In FIG. 8, 59 is a human detection sensor. It also has a receiving section (not shown) that emits ultrasonic waves or infrared rays forward of the cooking appliance 1 and receives the reflected input. This human detection sensor 59 is installed so that it emits infrared rays in the front (forward) direction of the heating chamber 6. Note that there is no dedicated circuit for processing the signal received by the receiving section, and the control device 40 analyzes the received signal to determine whether or not a person is present.

As indicated by the dashed line frame in FIG. 8, the audio notification unit 50 and the display unit 16 may be collectively referred to as the "notification unit", in which case the reference numeral 90 is used.
Reference numeral 26 denotes a light emission control unit. This light emission control unit controls the light emission of a large number of light emitting elements. The light emission of a light emitting element 27A composed of an LED or the like arranged in the individual light emitting unit 21M and a light emitting element 27B arranged in the input key 154M is controlled by this light emission control unit 26. When two or more light emitting elements 27 with different light emission colors are arranged in one place, the light emission state of the plurality of light emitting elements provides a visual effect to the user US as if the light emission color has changed.

In FIG. 8, reference numeral 52 denotes an input signal analysis section that analyzes an input signal from the input operation section 15 .
The input signal analysis unit 52 individually analyzes the input signals transmitted from the right operation unit 15R, the left operation unit 15L, and the central operation unit 15M. In particular, the input signal analysis unit 52 has a discrimination function for judging whether the input mode switching command (signal corresponding to voice input mode) MC1 has been received. When it is determined that the input mode switching command (signal corresponding to voice input mode) MC1 has been received, it issues a switching command for switching the input mode from the "touch input mode" to the "voice input mode 1."

In the following description, the "input mode switching command MC1" is referred to as the "voice input mode setting signal MC1." When the input processing unit 70 receives this voice input mode setting signal MC1, it issues a control signal to the voice signal analysis unit 52 to transition to a standby state for voice input (for example, to start a dedicated voice analysis program).

There are various input keys in the input operation unit 15. For example, as described in Fig. 5 and Fig. 6, the central operation unit 15M has input keys 107 to 109. The touch input results of these input keys are transmitted to the input signal analysis unit 52.
In particular, when the input key 107, which is one of the "voice input switching keys", is touched, the central operation unit 15M determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press", and the result of the determination (a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Similarly, the right operation section 15R and the left operation section 15L each have various input keys, and the touch input results of these input keys are transmitted to the input signal analysis section 52.
In particular, when input keys 107L and 107R, which are one of the "voice input switching keys", are touched, the left operation unit 15L or the right operation unit 15R determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press", and the determination result (a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Furthermore, the central operation unit 15M has a start key 113 and a stop key 114, and the touch input results of these input keys are transmitted to the input signal analysis unit 52.
In addition, the touch states of the start keys 113R, 113L and the stop keys 114R, 114L in the right operation section 15R and the left operation section 15L are also input to the input signal analysis section 52.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
Fig. 9 is a block diagram for explaining the relationship between the control device 40 and the central operation unit 15M. The voice signal receiving unit 56 explained in Fig. 8 is omitted. The right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L are basically configured in the same manner as the central operation unit 15M.

In FIG. 9, 15A is an input key identification unit. This input key identification unit 15A identifies the input key that has been touched. For example, when input key 107 is touched, it generates an identification signal unique to that input key. Also, when input key 108 is touched, it generates an identification signal unique to that input key.

Reference numeral 15B denotes a touch detection unit. When a fingertip FG of a user US or the like approaches the touch electrode unit, a detection circuit generates an "ON" signal, and when the fingertip FG moves away, the detection circuit generates an "OFF" signal.
A time measurement unit 15T measures the time from when the touch detection unit 15B outputs an "ON" signal to when the touch detection unit 15B changes to an "OFF" signal, and transmits measured time data.

15C is an input mode determination unit. This input mode determination unit 15C receives the measured time data from the time measurement unit 15T, and, as described above, with a threshold of 5 seconds as the boundary, if the measured time is 5 seconds or more, it determines that it is "voice input mode 1". If the measured time is less than this threshold, it determines that it is a normal "short press" operation.

In the following explanation, an embodiment will be described in which the input mode determination unit 15C of the central operation unit 15M determines whether or not a "long press" has occurred. However, although not adopted in the first embodiment, there is also a method in which the central operation unit 15M measures the time from the "ON" signal to the time when the signal changes to "OFF", transmits that data to the control device 40, and the control device 40 determines whether or not a "long press" has occurred.

In this embodiment 1, there is a function of detecting the above-mentioned "long press" of a specific input key (for example, input key 107 described later in the central operation unit 15M) and switching to the "voice input mode 1" as described above.
This will be explained in more detail later.

Note that touch operations that are not "long presses," i.e., touch states that are continuous for less than 5 seconds, may be called "short presses." Since this is also related to the detection capabilities of the central operation unit 15M, for example, if the touch time is within the range of 0.1 to 4.9 seconds, the input mode determination unit 15C determines that it is a "short press."

Not only the central operation unit 15M, but also the left operation unit 15L and the right operation unit 15R each have a determination unit equivalent to the input mode determination unit 15C. However, it is also possible to provide a single (common) input mode determination unit 15C that acquires data from all operation units individually and makes a centralized determination.

The input mode determination unit 15C transmits a signal (voice input mode corresponding signal MC1) indicating the determination result of whether or not the mode is "voice input mode 1" to the control device 40.

15D is a storage unit. This storage unit 15D stores various control parameters and thresholds for the touch detection unit 15A, the time measurement unit 15T, the input mode determination unit 15C, and the like, as well as program information for the determination process.

Reference numeral 15E denotes a central processing unit (CPU) that performs various information processing operations as an input operation unit (central operation unit 15M).
An input signal transmitting unit 15F transmits to the input signal analyzing unit 58 of the control device 40 a unique identification signal of the input key as described above and a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 as a result of determining whether the mode is "voice input mode 1".

15G is a dial rotation detection unit that detects a pulse signal generated in response to the rotation of dial-type input means 123 (described later), converts it into a command signal corresponding to the angle of rotation, and inputs the command signal to input key identification unit 15A. Note that dial-type selection means (dial-type input means) 123 rotates both clockwise and counterclockwise, and the direction of rotation is also identified.

In FIG. 9, the touch detection unit 15A, time measurement unit 15T, input mode determination unit 15C, etc. are depicted as individual independent blocks, but each of these functions may be realized, for example, by software on a single microcomputer, rather than being configured as separate components on hardware.

Although FIG. 9 shows an example of the central operation unit 15M, the control device 40 also identifies the input of the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L as being from each operation unit. Therefore, in the input key identification unit 15A in the right operation unit 15R, data identifying the input key present in the right operation unit 15R is included in the signal from the input key. The same is true for the left operation unit 15L.

As is clear from the above description, the cooking device 1 is
a first heating means HM1 for induction heating an object to be heated on the top plate 3;
A heating chamber 6 having a metal wall;
A second heating means HM2 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 6;
a third heating means HM3 for heating the heating chamber 6 with radiant heat;
A notification unit 90;
A communication unit 51;
A display unit 16;
The control device 40 is configured as follows.

,
The control device 40 displays an initial standby screen on the display unit 16, and then displays a display screen (first specific screen 16M1 to third specific screen 16M3) dedicated to each cooking mode.

There are three types of cooking modes: single cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, and linked cooking mode KM3.

The single cooking mode KM1 includes the following three types.
(1) an IH only mode in which the first heating means HM1 is operated alone; (2) a range only cooking mode in which the second heating means HM2 is operated alone; and (3) an oven only cooking mode in which the third heating means HM3 is operated alone.

The composite cooking mode KM2 is a heating pattern in which cooking is performed in the heating chamber 6 by simultaneously operating the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, or by automatically operating them at different times.

The coordinated cooking mode KM1 is a heating pattern in which the second heating means HM2 and/or the third heating means HM3 and the first heating means HM1 are operated sequentially after a transition period TR whose length is determined by a command from the user US.

The control device 40 has an operation program for executing the three cooking modes KM1 to KM3.
The data acquisition unit 53 of the control device 40 can acquire the recipe data CD from the cloud server 300 or the communication terminal 200 via the communication unit 51 .

In the input operation section 15, the "voice input mode 2" can be selected by the input key 180 provided in the central operation section 15M.
Furthermore, among the input keys arranged on the central operation unit 15M, the right operation unit 15R, and the left operation unit 15L, specific input keys (107, 107R, 107L) can select "voice input mode 1" according to the "long press" state, which is one of the touch forms.

(4. Configuration of the control menu of the central operation unit)
Next, a selectable control menu that is displayed on the central display unit 16M by the central operation unit 15M will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 10 shows the entire control menu that can be selected by the central operation unit 15M.
In the table of FIG. 10, the first area 22 is displayed as the "left display area," the second display area 23 is displayed as the "center display area," and the third area 24 is displayed as the "right display area."

The control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 15M are divided into an RG (range grill) menu group that uses the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) and one or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b, and an IH menu group that uses the central IH coil 9C that corresponds to the central heating port 4C.

Figure 11 shows the control menu shown in Figure 10 categorized into four perspectives (categories 1 to 4). As is clear from Figure 11, the control menu is broadly categorized into a single cooking mode KM1 and a combined cooking mode KM2. Note that although Figures 10 and 11 do not show the linked cooking mode KM1, the central operation unit 15M can execute a linked cooking menu using the linked cooking mode.

When the main power switch 20 is turned "ON" and the input key 108 of the central operation unit 15M is pressed for the first time, the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected.

Therefore, the display screen of the central display section 16M is switched to the second specific screen 16M2.
6, in the first area 22 (left display area) of the second specific screen 16M2, for example, a control menu item "Warm" is always displayed first. This is because the control menu item "Warm" is set as a default.

The left display area in FIG. 10 is a display area that corresponds to the first area 22. In other words, the various control menus listed in the "left display area" of the table in FIG. 11 are displayed sequentially in the first area 22.

As shown in the "left display area" of the table in Figure 10, in addition to "warm," there are a total of 13 control menus: "Microwave manual," "Pre-boil leafy vegetables," "Pre-boil root vegetables," "Defrost meat," "Microwave grill (RG) cooking," "Microwave grill (RG) reheat," "Microwave grill (RG) manual," "Grill," "Oven," "IH keep warm," "IH rice cooking," and "IH heating."

The control menus "Warm", "Manual microwave", "Pre-boil leafy vegetables", "Pre-boil root vegetables", "Defrost meat", "Range grill (RG) cooking", "Range grill (RG) reheat", "Range grill (RG) manual", "Grill", and "Oven" are included in the RG menu group.
In addition, "IH warming", "IH rice cooking", and "IH heating" are included in the "IH menu group" in which an induction heating source is used.

The contents shown in the "Central Display Area" in FIG. 10 are the contents displayed in the second area 23 of the central display unit 16M, and relate to adjustments to the heating conditions during cooking, such as temperature, time, heat, "high" or "low", etc. In other words, the various control conditions shown in the "Central Display Area" are displayed in the second area 23. The contents of the default settings for this "Central Display Area" are listed in the "Default" column in the right column of the "Central Display Area".

The contents written in the "right display area" of the table in FIG. 10 indicate the information to be displayed in the third area 24 of the central display section 16M.
The default settings for the "Right Display Area" are listed in the "Default" column in the right column of the "Right Display Area." A blank space does not represent a control condition that can be changed, but rather indicates that no information is displayed, or that an appropriate explanatory text that cannot be selected or changed (by the user US) is displayed in the right display area (third area 24).

Next, a total of 13 types of control menus displayed in the "left display area" of the table in FIG. 10 will be described.
(1) Warming: refers to heating the food in the heating chamber 6 using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). This "warming" is also suitable for reheating the food. The default setting is "80°C", so microwave heating automatically stops when the food is heated to 80°C. Note that "80°C" is the target temperature, and this temperature can be adjusted by the user US before heating begins. As shown in the central display area of FIG. 10, for example, the range from 0°C to 90°C can be set in 5°C increments.

(2) Manual range: This refers to heating the food in the heating chamber 6 using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). The heating time is set by the user US to a specific time between 10 seconds and 60 minutes.

(3) Parboiling of leafy vegetables: This is suitable for boiling the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6 using a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2), particularly vegetables whose leaves are edible, such as spinach, Chinese cabbage, and other leafy vegetables. The infrared sensor 13 measures the temperature rise of the food to be cooked in real time and automatically stops.

(4) Parboiling of root vegetables: This is suitable for parboiling the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6, particularly roots, rhizomes, potatoes, and other root vegetables, using a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2).

(5) Meat thawing: Suitable for thawing various kinds of frozen meat in the heating chamber 6.
(6) Range grill (RG) cooking: Food items in the heating chamber 6 are cooked by combining microwave heating using a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) with oven heating using upper radiant heat heating means 12a and lower radiant heat heating means 12b.

(7) Range Grill (RG) Re-cooking: Suitable for re-heating food that has already been cooked in the heating chamber 6.
(8) Range Grill (RG) Manual: The user US appropriately selects between microwave heating and oven heating to heat and cook the food in the heating chamber 6.

(9) Grill: This uses one or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b to heat food in the heating chamber 6. In other words, this is a control menu that uses the third heating means HM3.

In the "Grill" mode, the temperature of the heating chamber 6 is not managed, nor is there any control to stop the heating operation by detecting a rise in the temperature of the food being cooked. The heating operation is performed for a period of time specified by the user US within a range of 10 seconds to 30 minutes.

(10) Oven: An oven that uses one or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b to heat the food in the heating chamber 6. The temperature of the heating chamber 6 is measured in real time by a thermistor sensor 14, and the power supply to the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b is controlled so that the temperature reaches the set target temperature.

(11) IH Warm: Heats a heated object such as a pot placed above the central heating port 4C so as to keep it at a temperature set by the user US. Low to medium heat of 200W to 750W is used for induction heating, and a temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C detects the temperature of the heated object in real time, and the heating control unit 43 of the control device 40 controls the heat based on the detected temperature. The default temperature is 80°C as shown in Figure 10. For example, it is suitable for keeping soup warm.

(12) IH rice cooking: Heats according to the total number (amount of rice cooked) set by the user US. Induction heating powers range from low to high, from 200W to 1500W. A temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C is used to detect abnormal heating of the heated object (also called an overheated state or overheating; the same applies below), and if an abnormal temperature is detected, the control device 40 reduces the heat or stops the heating operation.

(13) IH heating: Heats according to the induction heating power set by the user US. There are five levels of heat that can be set: Heat 1: 200 W, Heat 2: 500 W, Heat 3: 750 W, Heat 4: 1000 W, and Heat 5: 1500 W. A temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C is used to detect abnormal heating of the heated object, and if an abnormal temperature is detected, the control device 40 reduces the heat or stops the heating operation. The default heat is 500 W (heat 2).

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 11 is a classification table of the RG control menus ("RG menu group" in FIG. 10) and the IH control menus ("IH menu group" in FIG. 10) of the single cooking mode KM3 by the first heating means HM1.

As is clear from category 2 in the list in Figure 11, the names of the control menus are also displayed in text in the first area 22 of the central display unit 16M, and are used by the user US to select a control menu.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 12 is a table showing the correspondence between the cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 and the operation support information 170 (see FIG. 7).

As is clear from FIG. 12, the cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is hamburger steak, roast beef, etc., and as explained in FIG. 7, the contents of the process display section 172 and the support information A and support information B are determined in advance in correspondence with the identification information 167 that identifies each of these cooking menus. In other words, the display data that determines the display information to be displayed on the display section 16 is stored in the memory section 41.

As can be seen from FIG. 12, there are two types of operation support information 170: operation support information A and operation support information B. One is information that says "Press the start button to start heating the left induction cooker," and the other is information that says "Press the start button to confirm." This "start button" refers to the input key 113 (see FIG. 13).

The above-mentioned two types of operation support information 170 are automatically switched before the start of the cooking process in the collaborative cooking mode KM1. For example, they are displayed alternately every few seconds.
As is clear from FIG. 12, there are at least eight types of cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, such as hamburger steak and roast beef, and these are broadly divided into two types: cooking menus in which microwave heating is performed first and cooking menus in which induction heating is performed first.

In the table of FIG. 12, the entry "IH preheating" in the column "Display of process display section 172" will be described.
In this embodiment 1, a "cooperative preheat cooking mode" KM1A is provided as one type of the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
There are two types of coordinated preheat cooking modes KM1A.

An example of a cooking menu that utilizes the linked preheat cooking mode KM1A is "hamburger steak." In the case of "hamburger steak," the preheating process is performed using the first heating means HM1.

If cooking process 1 is started while the preheating process is being performed, the heating operation of the preheating process has not been stopped at the time when cooking process 1 is started.
Therefore, the energization of the first heating means HM1 and the energization of the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) and the third heating means HM3 in charge of cooking process 1 are performed in parallel during the same time period.

In other words, in the linked preheat cooking mode KM1A, the heating source (in the above description, the first heating means HM1) that has been operating before cooking process 1 is not necessarily stopped at the start of cooking process 1, and during cooking process 1, power may be applied to either or both of the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) and the third heating means HM3.

Unless there is a particular contradiction, the following explanation will be based on the assumption that the linked cooking mode KM1 includes the linked preheat cooking mode KM1A.

When the collaborative cooking mode KM1A is selected, once the identification information 167 indicating the name of the food to be cooked is displayed on the central display unit 16M, the left operation unit 15L cannot be used for other cooking menus (also called the "occupied state").

Specifically, among the various input keys on the left operation unit 15L, at least the input key 107L (not shown) that selects the left heating port 4L is disabled by the heating control unit 43. This "disabled" means both that a valid command signal is not sent from the input key 107L (not shown) to the heating control unit 43, and that even if a valid command signal is sent, the heating control unit 43 does not process the command signal as a valid command signal. In either case, heating with the left IH coil 9L cannot be selected.

At the same time, when the identification information 167 is displayed, the right operation unit 15R of the right heating port 4R may be made unusable. As in the case of the left operation unit 15L, this is done by "disabling" the input key 107R (not shown). However, if the user US has set the function in advance on the input operation unit 15 (using the function setting key 115 shown in FIG. 13) so that this "disabling" is not performed, and if the right IH coil 9R is already being used for another control menu (heating operation is ongoing), the right IH coil 9R can be used as is. On the other hand, in the linked cooking mode KM1, due to the fact that it has already been used, it is determined that it cannot be used (by the heating control unit 43).

Therefore, only the left IH coil 9L is "occupied" by the selection of the linked cooking mode KM1. Also, when viewed from the perspective of the first heating source HM1 as a whole, the use of only a portion of the three heating sections 4L, 4C, 4R (the left IH coil 9L) is "restricted." Note that if the right IH coil 9R is not being used for other cooking, the right IH coil 9R may also be placed in an occupied state.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the central display section 16M when the cooking appliance 1 is on standby.
The display screen 16MH of the central display section 16M is a standby initial screen. The standby initial screen 16MH will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 28. There are a plurality of types of standby initial screens 16MH, and the screen in Fig. 13 may be called display screen 2D to distinguish it from display screens 2A to 2C shown in Fig. 28.

In FIG. 13, reference numeral 102 denotes a display section showing information for specifying the input key 107 for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM1, and the information shows the characters "TO KEY 1".
Reference numeral 103 denotes a display section showing information for specifying the input key 108 for selecting the composite cooking mode, and the information shows "Go to key 2" in characters.
Reference numeral 104 denotes a display section showing information for specifying an input key 109 for selecting an independent cooking mode using induction heating (IH), and the information shows "Go to key 3" in characters.
It should be noted that the three display units 102 to 104 do not have a touch input function, so that no input can be made by touching these units.

The input key 107 is an input key for selecting the collaborative cooking mode KM1. The input key 107 is configured as a touch switch. The input key 107 is disposed on the front side of the first area 22.
Reference numeral 107A denotes the first identification information, which is displayed as the number "1." In other words, the first identification information 107A corresponds to the display content of the display unit 102, "To key 1."

The input key 108 is an input key for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2. The input key 108 is configured as a touch switch. The input key 108 is disposed on the front side of the second area 23.
Reference numeral 108A denotes second identification information, and is displayed as the number “2.” In other words, this second identification information 108A corresponds to the display content of the display unit 103.

The input key 109 is an input key for selecting the single cooking mode KM3 by induction heating (IH). It is composed of a touch-type switch. This input key 109 is disposed on the front side of the third area 24.
Reference numeral 109A denotes third identification information, and is displayed as the number “3.” In other words, this third identification information 109A corresponds to the display content of the display unit 104.

The first specific information 107A to the third specific information 109A and the display contents of the display units 102 to 104 are shown to correspond to each other by the numbers "1" to "3" as shown in FIG. 5, but the correspondence may be shown by symbols or letters other than numbers, the same figures, etc.

As a result, for example, when selecting the collaborative cooking mode KM1, it is understood that it is sufficient to operate the input key 107 on which the first specific information 107A is displayed. In addition to the number "1", a name or abbreviation indicating the cooking mode, such as "collaborative cooking", may be displayed.

Several types of first specific information 107A are prepared. Only in the first operation scene of input key 107, the number "1" is displayed as shown in FIG. 15, but in the next scene, the word "Menu" is displayed as shown in FIG. 14. In this way, the display content of first specific information 107A changes appropriately depending on the display of the light-emitting portion (not shown) located below the operation surface (visible light transmitting material) of input key 107.

The information displayed on the display screen of the central display unit 16M1 is updated sequentially in response to input operations by the display program of the control device 40 (described later) or a dedicated drive circuit (not shown).

When the input key 107 is operated, a first specific screen 16M1 used in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is displayed on the central display section 16M. An example of the first specific screen 16M1 is shown in FIG.
When the input key 108 is operated, a second specific screen 16M2 (see FIG. 41) used in the composite cooking mode KM2 is displayed on the central display section 16M.
When the input key 109 is operated, a third specific screen 16M3 (not shown) used in the single cooking mode KM3 by induction heating (IH) is displayed on the central display section 16M. An example of the third specific screen 16L3 when the left operation section 16L is used is shown in FIG. 29.

The first specific screen 16M1 to the third specific screen 16M3 are not displayed simultaneously on the central display unit 16M, but are displayed alternatively.

Reference numeral 113 denotes an input key for starting three types of cooking on the central operation unit 15M. The input key is a touch-type input key, and an input command signal is generated when the input key is touched. This input key 113 will be referred to as a "start key" hereinafter.
Reference numeral 114 denotes an input key that can stop the three types of heating cooking (three types) cooking modes in the central operation unit 15M at any timing. It is a touch-type input key, and an input command signal is issued when touched. This input key 114 will be referred to as a "stop key" hereinafter.

The three types of heating and cooking in the central operation unit 15M are as follows.
(1) Cooperative cooking mode KM1 using heating chamber 6
(2) Combined cooking mode KM2 using heating chamber 6
(3) Single cooking mode KM3 using microwave heating means (second heating means) HM2 using the heating chamber 6
(4) Single cooking mode KM3 using the induction heating means (first heating means) HM1 using the central heating port 4C

The input key 115 located at the leftmost side of the central operation unit 15M is used to allow the user to set the various operations and displays of the entire cooking device 1 as desired.

When the input key 115 is pressed, the control device 40, which will be described later, switches to a "function mode," and displays a "function setting menu" such as the one shown below on the display screen of the central display unit 16M.
(1) Child lock setting (disable operation of various input keys)
(2) Setting the ventilation fan linked mode (3) Setting the cleaning guide (setting the automatic notification function for when to clean the heating chamber 6 and exhaust cover 5)
(4) Peak cut setting (maximum power consumption can be selected from four levels: 5700W, 5000W, 4800W, and 4000W)
(5) Audio settings for the audio guide (6) Volume settings for the audio guide (7) Settings to prevent forgetting to remove food, cooking utensils, etc. from the heating chamber 6 (whether or not to issue an alarm on the audio notification unit 50 and the three display units 16L, 16M, and 16R)
(8) HEMS registration settings (settings related to the power usage limiting function of the home power control device)
(9) Setting the time unit for timer cooking (changing the 1-minute setting to 5-minute or 30-minute units) (10) Switching between beginner mode and normal (experienced) mode (11) Setting the type (range) of inventory information obtained from the refrigerator 403 (12) Setting the display priority (specific cooking menu, identification information 167, to be displayed as the default) of each cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (13) Setting the display priority (specific control menu, to be displayed as the default) of each control menu (e.g., "range grill", "pre-boil leafy vegetables") in the composite cooking mode KM2 (14) Setting the cooking mode to be automatically displayed on the central display unit 16M when the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after the main power switch 20 is turned ON (display priority between the cooperative cooking mode KM1 and the composite cooking mode KM2, etc.)
(15) When each cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is displayed on the central display unit 16M, the ingredients and nutritional components of the target cooking item (food) are displayed individually each time. Note that either the food ingredients or the nutrients or both may be displayed, but in this embodiment 1, a single press (short press) of the input key 109 is used as a display command key for food ingredients, and a double press (short press) is used as a display command key for nutritional components.
When the input key 19 is operated once or twice within a specified period, or when a voice command is given by setting voice input mode 1, food ingredients or nutritional ingredients are displayed. In other words, they are not always displayed together with cooking menu identification information 167 (described later) but are displayed in response to the operation (including voice) of the user US. Details will be described with reference to FIG. 20.
(16) When selecting individual cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, a setting to search for cooking menu candidates based on the ingredients and nutritional components of food and display them on the central display unit 16M. In this case, the user US can search by voice by pressing the input key 180 to set to "voice input mode 2." Details will be described in FIG. 20.
(17) Setting the display priority of each cooking menu in the collaborative cooking mode KM1.
In relation to the setting of a specific cooking menu to be displayed by default, either the food components or the nutritional components should be set as the top priority item for display. By setting this, for example, cooking menus can be displayed in ascending order of energy amount (calorie value) among nutritional components as shown in Figure 20. Alternatively, cooking menus can be displayed in descending order of the amount of "iron" as a nutritional component.

The "beginner mode" is an optional function for people (users) who are not familiar with using the cooking device 1. When the beginner mode is set, the voice guidance in the voice notification unit 50 becomes more detailed and thorough. In addition, the number of voice guidance regarding input operations in the input operation unit 15 increases, and the display information on the display screens of the display units 16L, 16M, and 16R increases.

When the beginner mode is set, particularly in the case of cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM1, the amount of reference information displayed on the display screen of the central display unit 16M increases in cooking step 1 and cooking step 2, or the content of the audio guidance in the audio notification unit 50 increases. This enhances the function of supporting the user's input operations.

When the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after the main power switch 20 is turned on, the cooking mode setting that is automatically displayed on the central display unit 16M is to set either the linked cooking mode KM1 or the composite cooking mode KM2. Since both the linked cooking mode KM1 and the composite cooking mode KM2 use the same central display unit 16M, the user can set which of the two modes is to be given priority.

When the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after the main power switch 20 is turned on, the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has been opened.
This function assumes that the user will be cooking using the heating chamber 6, and automatically displays either the first specific screen 16M1 for the linked cooking mode KM1 or the second specific screen 16M2 for the composite cooking mode KM2 on the central display unit 16M.
The first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2 is automatically displayed immediately after the door 7 is opened after the above-mentioned standby initial screen is displayed.

When input key 115 is pressed, a "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen of central display unit 16M. After that, by "long pressing" (hereinafter referred to as "long press") a specific input key (e.g., 107) other than input key 15 on central operation unit 16M, one setting menu from the "function setting menu" can be selected, and the desired setting contents can be subsequently changed.

Alternatively, if two specific input keys (e.g., 107 and 108) other than the input key 115 are simultaneously "pressed and held," one of the setting menus in the "function setting menu" described above can be called up and the desired setting contents can be changed.

The term "long press" refers to a state in which the button is pressed continuously for five seconds or more, for example.
The input mode determination unit 15C (see FIG. 9) determines whether the state is a "long press" by comparing the timing of the touch input in the central operation unit 15M with a reference value. That is, in the central operation unit 15M, the timing at which the input key (e.g., 107) is pressed can be determined by an ON (when touched)-OFF (when not touched) signal, and the time from the ON signal to the point at which it changes to an OFF signal is measured to determine whether the state is a "long press." This is the same as the "long press" process of the input key 107, and will be described in detail later.

In FIG. 13, reference numeral 123 denotes a dial-type selection means disposed at the right end of the central operation unit 40M.
When the user turns this selection means 123 after pressing any one of the input keys 107 to 109, the user can set the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 or the control conditions (heat power during induction heating, microwave output, etc.) to be applied to a specific cooking menu. This will be described in the next Figure 14.

The selection means can be rotated both clockwise and counterclockwise around the rotation center point CP, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 13. It can also be rotated one or more times, but the rotation range may be limited to a certain range. The selection means 123 is fixed to the central operating unit 15M so as to be freely rotatable by a rotation axis (not shown) at the center point CP.

21M1 to 21M5 are individual light-emitting units that indicate that the input functions of the six input keys 107, 108, 109, 113, 114, and 115 are active. These individual light-emitting units 21M1 to 21M5 receive light from light-emitting elements 27, such as light-emitting diodes (LEDs), and emit light above the central operation unit 15M. Note that in FIG. 13, star-shaped marks are attached to the individual light-emitting units 21M1, 21M2, 21M3, and 21M5, respectively, which indicate that the corresponding light-emitting elements 27 are emitting light. In other words, in the example of FIG. 13, a total of four input keys 107, 108, 109, and 115 all indicate that their input functions are active.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
When the input key 107 is touched in the state shown in Fig. 13, the central display unit 16M switches to the first specific screen 16M1 as shown in Fig. 14. That is, the screen switches from the initial standby screen (Fig. 13) to a state in which the first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is displayed, and the identification information 167 of "hamburger" is displayed as the default cooking menu. In this case, the touch operation of the input key 107 may be a "short press" or a "long press."

14, the first identification information 107A displayed on the input keys 107 is changed from a number to a name indicating a type of function, namely, "menu." In this case, "menu" refers to a cooking menu.
Also, the second specification information 108A displayed on the input keys 108 changes from the number "2" to "left/right", information for selecting the heating ports 4L and 4R of the induction heating source 9. Note that, since there is no item to be inputted on the input keys 109, nothing is displayed as the third specification information 109A.

In the state shown in FIG. 14, the input key 107 has a function of selecting "menu" as indicated by the first identification information 16M1. Therefore, after operating the input key 107, if the dial-type selection means 123 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise as indicated by the thick arrow, the cooking menu identification information 167 displayed in the first area 22 changes sequentially in a fixed order according to the rotation range. In other words, it changes to the cooking menu identification information for a different cooked food.

As described above, the arrow portion displayed on the dial portion of the selection means 123 emits light from the moment the input key 107 is selected. This prompts the user to turn the selection means 123. The color of the light emitted by the arrow portion may be changed before and after the input key 107 is operated.

As shown in FIG. 14, the heating unit specifying parts 116L and 116R are also displayed together with the identification information 167.
Either the heating unit specifying unit 116L or 116R can be selected by operating the input key 108. Specifically, the input key 108 is pressed, and then the dial-type selection means 523 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise as shown by the thick arrow. Alternatively, when the input key 107 is pressed once, "left" is selected first (by default) as shown in FIG. 14, and when the input key 108 is pressed once subsequently, "right" is selected. Furthermore, when the same input key 108 is pressed, "left" is selected again.

As can be seen from the above explanation, in the input operation unit 40, when the input key 107 is operated once (either a short press or a long press) to select the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the input key 107 is operated once (either a short press or a long press) immediately afterwards. This causes a selection process of the cooking menu to be displayed in the first area 22. Then, by rotating the selection means 123, the cooking menus are displayed one after another in the first area 22 according to the rotation range of the selection means 123. In other words, a selection signal of the cooking menu corresponding to the rotation of the selection means 123 is given to the control device 40.

In FIG. 14, star marks are attached to the individual light-emitting sections 21M1, 21M2, and 21M4 corresponding to the three input keys 107, 108, and 113. In other words, the three input keys 107, 108, and 113 all indicate that their input functions are enabled.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
When one of the heating unit specifying sections 116L and 116R shown in FIG. 14 is selected, the display content of the first specifying screen 16M1 is switched to the content shown in FIG.
As shown in Fig. 15, input key 109 becomes active, and pressing this switches to an input mode for "heat," which is one of the control conditions. Therefore, when selection means 123 is rotated, four-level heat display band 117 lights up. Therefore, when selection means 123 is rotated, the illuminated range changes left and right according to the angle of rotation. At the same time, a specific heat value, such as "1000W," is displayed as additional information 118 (a level, such as "medium" heat, may also be displayed).

In this way, the user US can select the desired heat value in one go by simply holding the dial-type selection means 123 and gently turning it clockwise. This significantly reduces the operational burden on the user US compared to a method in which the heat value is selected by repeatedly performing touch operations, such as with a touch input switch.

As is clear from FIG. 15, when setting the heat value of the induction heating source 9, the input function of only the two input keys 109, 113 is enabled, as indicated by the star marks on the individual light-emitting sections 21M3, 21M4 corresponding to these two input keys. The input function of the dial-type selection means 123 is also enabled, as indicated by the thick arrow portion lit up as shown in FIG. 15.

Therefore, if the input key 113 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 15, the mode will transition to the coordinated cooking mode KM1. Therefore, the preheating process (IH preheating) of the heated object N, such as a frying pan, can be started at either the heating port 4L or 4R.

In FIG. 15, 109A is the third specific information displayed on the input key 109. In the scene in FIG. 15, this third specific information 109A is displayed as the text "heat", but it automatically changes to information indicating other control conditions such as "time" or "temperature" depending on the input scene.

Figure 16 shows Variation 1 of the first embodiment shown in Figures 13 to 15, and is a plan view of the front portion to explain the arrangement of the central operating unit 15M and the central display unit 16M.

The characteristic configuration of FIG. 16 will be described.
The heating cooker 1 of this modified example 1 is
A main body 2 having three heating ports 4L, 4C, and 4R arranged on an upper surface thereof on which an object to be heated N is placed;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) is installed inside the main body 2 and heats the object to be heated N;
A heating chamber 6 formed inside the main body 2;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 11) and a third heating means HM3 (radiant heat heating means 12) for heating the food in the heating chamber 6;
A display means (central display unit) 16M having a display screen visible from above the main body 2;
An input operation unit 15 is provided on the front part of the upper surface of the main body 2 and is elongated in the left-right direction;
A control device 40 that receives a command from the input operation unit 15 and controls a heating operation,
The input operation unit 15 is adjacent to the display means (central display unit 16M) and is located in front of it.
The input operation unit 15 has a first cooking mode selection means (input key) 107 and a second cooking mode selection means (input key) 108 for displaying a cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 and a control menu of the composite cooking mode M2 on the display screen, respectively.
a first identification information 107A indicating that the mode is for the linked cooking mode KM1 is displayed on an operation unit (operation surface) of the first cooking mode selection means 107 or a position nearby the operation unit; and a second identification information 108A indicating that the mode is for the composite cooking mode KM2 is displayed on an operation unit (operation surface) of the second cooking mode selection means 108 or a position nearby the operation unit;
Furthermore, the configuration includes a dial-type selection means 123 for displaying the cooking menu of the combined cooking mode KM1 in a selectable manner after the first cooking mode selection means (input key) 107 is selected.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16 , the touch operation portion of the input key 107, which is the first cooking mode selection means, and the touch operation portion of the input key 108, which is the second cooking mode selection means, are disposed in front of the central display unit 16M and on the top surface of the main body 2.
Furthermore, the central operation unit 15M is provided with a dial-type selection means 123 which, after the first cooking mode selection means 107 is touched, displays identification information 167 indicating the cooking menu in sequence in response to a rotation operation on the central display unit 16M (the displayed first specific screen 16M1).

Furthermore, the central operation unit 15M utilizes the dial-type selection means 123 as a means for displaying the identification information 160 indicating the control menu in sequence in response to a rotation operation on the central display unit 16M (the displayed second specific screen 16M2) after the input key 108, which is the second cooking mode selection means, is touched.

The display screen of the central display unit has a first area 22 for displaying the cooking menu and the control menu, and a second area 23 for displaying information related to the information displayed in the first area 22, arranged side by side;
The first area 22 displays the identification information 167 or the identification information 160,
The second area 23 is configured to display, in response to rotating the dial-type selection means 123, "control conditions" (such as heat and heating time) that can be applied to either the cooking menu or the control menu, which are updated one by one in sequence.

The "control conditions" referred to here are basically the same as those described in the first embodiment. That is, they are at least one of the following: a heating power value indicating heating intensity or power consumption, a level value indicating a hierarchy of heating intensity (heating power "high" or "low", etc.), a microwave output value, a heating target temperature, and a heating time, but are not limited to these.

In FIG. 16, 120 indicates display information that is displayed in place of the display "Cooperative cooking" in FIG. 13, and there are three types: "Menu," "Heat and time," and "Reference," but an example of "Reference" is not shown in FIG. 16.

The display information 120 called “Menu” is always displayed in the first area 22 .
The display information 120 "heat and time" is always displayed in the second area 23. Moreover, the display information 120 "reference" is displayed in the third area 24, but there are also cases where the second area 23 and the third area 24 are combined to form a larger display area and the display information 120 is displayed in that area.

In FIG. 16, the first specific information 107A and the second specific information 108A are not displayed on the top surface of the central operation unit 15 itself, but are displayed as text on the touch operation unit (operation surface) of the first cooking mode selection means (input key) 107 and the second cooking mode selection means (input key) 108. However, this may be changed to a different configuration, and text may be displayed (printed, engraved, etc.) adjacent to and in front of the touch operation surfaces of the input keys 107 and 108.

In the modified example of FIG. 16, 180 is an input key 180 (dedicated) for selecting the voice input mode shown in FIG. 4. In this modified example, this input key 180 is not a mechanical switch, but a touch-type input switch like input keys 107 to 109. 21M6 is an individual light-emitting element that emits light to indicate when the input function of this input key 180 is active. In the state shown in FIG. 16, the three individual light-emitting elements 21M1, 21M2, and 21M3 are marked with star shapes. In other words, these three input keys all have active input functions, and touching any one of them indicates that any one of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the single cooking mode KM3 can be selected.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
Steps ST1 to ST8 are operation steps defined in the operation program (including recipe data CD) of the heating control unit 43 for the collaborative cooking mode KM1.
First, when the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed (ST1), the next step ST2 is a step in which the heating control section 43 determines whether or not there is an abnormality.

At step ST2, the central display unit 16M is activated and displays the message "There are no abnormalities, so cooking can begin." At this stage, the heating control unit 43 also checks whether it has received a setting command from the input operation unit 15 regarding the upper limit of the total power consumption.

The right operation unit 15R and right display unit 16R as well as the left operation unit 15L and left display unit 16L are also activated in step ST2 and display the same content as that displayed on the central display unit 16M.

If the cooking appliance 1 is set to transmit startup information to the communication terminal 200 or the external server 417 (cloud server 300) in step ST2, the communication unit 51 wirelessly transmits the startup information (a type of operating status data OS) at this stage.

In the next step ST3, the central display unit 16M and the audio notification unit 51 also provide a notification and audio guidance to prompt the user to select the heating means.
In the next step ST4, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display section 16M, and also, usage precautions for the user US are displayed.

The right display unit 16R and the left display unit 16L also issue a notification to prompt the user to select the heating method at step ST3, but since the audio notification unit 50 has already issued a notification, no duplicate notification is issued.

Then, it is determined whether an input key other than input key 107 of central operation unit 15M (e.g., 108M) has been operated (ST5). If input key 107 has been operated, step ST5 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step ST6. In other words, the process proceeds to the step of using "linked cooking mode" KM1.

In step ST6, the permission condition determination unit 54 (see FIG. 8) checks whether the "permission conditions" are met. For example, it checks the usage status of the heat source used in the cooking steps (cooking step 1, cooking step 2, etc.) of the "linked cooking mode" KM1. For example, it checks whether microwave cooking is being performed in the heating chamber 6.

In step ST5, the first input operation is checked. For example, it is determined whether the left operation unit 15L or the right operation unit 15R was operated before the input key 107 was pressed, and it is also determined whether the "combined cooking mode" KM2 was selected by the central operation unit 15M (by the input key 108). It is also determined whether the input key 109 was pressed.

If the input key 107 on the central operation unit 15M is operated for the first time (touch operation, either a "short press" or a "long press") within a certain grace period (e.g. 30 seconds) from step ST3, the display for the "collaborative cooking mode" KM1 will start as described above.

On the other hand, if input key 107 is not operated and another input key (e.g., input key 108 or 109) is touched, step ST5 is judged as "Yes", and the process proceeds to step ST9 to start cooking in a mode other than "combined cooking mode" KM3. Note that a detailed description of step ST9 is omitted here.

In FIG. 17, steps ST6 and ST7 are operation steps of "permission condition 1" that decides whether or not cooking in the "combined cooking mode" KM1 is permitted.
Step ST6 is a stage for judging "permission condition 1".

Here, "permission condition 1" means
(1) The "peak cut value" that specifies the upper limit of the maximum power that can be used by the cooking device 1 is 5000 W or more.
(2) When there is a power reduction command signal received by the control device 40 via the communication unit 51 from the external cloud server 300 or the communication terminal 200, the peak cut value of the reduction command is 5000 W or more;
If these two conditions are met, the determination in step ST6 is "Yes."

The "permission condition 2" in the next step ST7 is the following four conditions.
(1) In the first heating means HM1, the central heating port 4C is not in heating operation.
(2) Either the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3, or both, are not in heating operation.

(3) In the first heating means HM1, neither the right heating port 4R nor the left heating port 4L is being used for the heating operation (or only one of them is being used for the heating operation). In other words, neither the left IH coil 9L nor the right IH coil 9R is being used for the heating operation.
(4) The "permission condition 4" described later is satisfied. In other words, the latest temperature of the top plate 3 is not a high temperature exceeding a limit value (for example, 80° C. or 100° C.).

If the above four conditions are met, step ST7 will be judged as "Yes". Then, proceed to step ST10. In other words, you can proceed to the step of inputting the start of cooking in the linked cooking mode KM1.

If the determination in steps ST6 and STR7 is "No," the process proceeds to step ST8, and the central display unit 16M and the audio notification unit 50 inform the user US that the collaborative cooking mode KM1 cannot be selected.

Here, we will explain the meaning of the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" being specified as "5000 W or more." For simplicity, the following explanation will not specifically mention the power consumption of electrical components other than the heat source, such as the internal cooling fan (not shown) of the main body 2.

The reason why the required demand (power demand amount secured in advance) for implementing the "Cooperative cooking mode" KM3 is 5000W or more is because the maximum (instantaneous) power required for each heating source during operation in cooperative cooking mode is as follows:

(1) Microwave operation (second heating means HM2): 1000 W
(2) When the oven is operating: 2000 W (upper radiant heat heating means 12a: 1000 W, lower radiant heat heating means 12b: 1000 W)
(3) Range grill operation: 1500 W (second heating means HM2: 500 W, upper radiant heat heating means 12a: 1000 W)

On the other hand, the maximum power for a cooking menu in the "combined cooking mode" KM1 is 1500W.
Therefore, in the combined cooking mode, the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 may operate simultaneously.

In other words, the maximum power is 3500W, which is the sum of the "1000W" of the second heating means HM2, the "1000W" of the third heating means HM3 (2000W is achieved by alternating current of 1000W each time), and the "1500W" of the first heating means HM1 that performs induction heating.

When the demand (pre-securing power demand) is 5000W:
When the right induction coil 9R is performing 3000W heating (normal heating), the remaining demand is 2000W.
When the "coordinated cooking mode" KM1 is implemented from this state, the remaining demand is 1500W short of the 3500W of power required for coordinated cooking, so the heating power of the right IH coil 9R is reduced to 1500W (from 3000W) and coordinated cooking can be started.

If the demand (pre-securing power demand) is 4000W:
When frying food using the right heating port 4R (requiring a maximum of 1500W), the remaining demand is 2500W.
If coordinated cooking is performed from this state, the remaining demand is 1000 W short of the 3500 W of power required for coordinated cooking, so the heat of the right IH coil must be reduced. However, if the heat is reduced while the automatic control menu is being executed, cooking will not go well, so the heat of the automatic control menu cannot be reduced.
In the end, 4000W is not enough to provide the required heat for the automatic control menu.

As is clear from the above explanation, before starting the "linked cooking mode" KM1, it is necessary to determine (confirm) whether there is a demand (power demand secured in advance) of 5000 W, which is the sum of the power required for linked cooking (3500 W) and the power required for the cooking menu of the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L (1500 W).

The first specific screen 16M1 is not displayed unless the prerequisites for transitioning to the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 (permission condition 1 and permission condition 2) are met. Therefore, it is not the case that after the user US sets (selects) various conditions for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (e.g., identification information 167), it is determined that permission condition 1 or permission condition 2 is not met, and the screen returns to the initial standby screen stage. Therefore, the user US is not forced to perform unnecessary input operations.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 18 illustrates an operation from when the cooking appliance 1 is started up until when recipe data CD for the cooking appliance 1 is acquired from the communication terminal 200 or the external server 417 (cloud server 300).

In this embodiment 1, the recipe data CD for the coordinated cooking mode KM1 includes, but is not limited to, the number of the coordinated cooking menu (identification information 167), the order of the multiple heating means used, the heating means used in cooking step 1, the heating means used in cooking step 2, if there is a cooking step 3 or later, the heating means used for each of those cooking steps, and if there are default (standard settings) control conditions (heat, heating time, target heating temperature, etc.) for each cooking step, the setting value or range of the setting value. Furthermore, it is not necessary that all of this information is required, and only a portion of it may be included.

In FIG. 18, steps SS1 to SS8 are operational steps defined in the integrated control program of the control device 40, and are basically identical to the content defined in the operational program of the collaborative cooking mode KM1 described in FIG. 17.

When the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed first (SS1), the next step SS2 is a step in which the heating control unit 43 determines whether or not there is an abnormality.

Steps SS1 to SS4 are the same as steps ST1 to ST4 described in Figure 17, so duplicate explanations will be omitted.

Step SS5 is a step in which the cooking appliance 1 asks the user US for prior confirmation as to whether or not to transmit a signal requesting provision of cooking recipe data CD to a communication terminal 200 such as a smartphone or the cloud server 300 that has been registered in advance. A "confirmation screen" is displayed on the central display unit 16M, and is also notified by the audio notification unit 50. This "confirmation screen" is a type of the initial standby screen 16MH described below.

If the user US sets in advance using the function setting key 115 (see FIG. 13) of the input operation unit 15 to automatically execute the external connection in step SS5, it will be executed automatically at a specified timing.

In other words, as described in FIG. 1, pairing between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking appliance 1 can be automatically performed, and wireless communication between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking appliance 1 can be established.

The external connection in step SS5 is performed by repeatedly transmitting and receiving alternately several times between the cooking appliance 1 and the external communication device (such as the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300). For example, when the cooking appliance 1 first transmits a standby signal 1, the external communication device receives the standby signal 1 and transmits a setting signal 1 including setting information. In response to this, the cooking appliance 1 checks its internal standby state (such as the set value of the total power consumption) and, if there are no problems, transmits a standby signal 2 to proceed to the next stage. This is the process.

Finally, the cooking appliance 1 completes the reception of the necessary setting information (including the recipe data CD) from the external communication device. In other words, after receiving the information once, it performs several alternating communications, such as returning a confirmation signal immediately thereafter, and finally completes the reception of the necessary setting information. In this series of steps, there is a step that asks the user US to decide whether or not to receive the recipe data CD. In other words, in this cooking appliance 1, there is a step where the user US can clearly and in advance recognize that the recipe data CD will be received, and therefore it is prevented from proceeding to the execution stage of the recipe data CD without the user US knowing about it.

On the other hand, if the above-mentioned external connection is not set to be performed automatically, in step SS6, a predetermined icon or the like is displayed on the central display section 16M to inform the user US that recipe data CD can be provided. This is shown on the display screen 2C (initial screen 16MH in standby mode) in FIG. 35. The display to inform the user US is, for example, simply displayed in text, as shown by 60P on the display screen 2C. 60P is called acquisition operation support information.

If in step SS6 the user does not consent to connection to the external device (such as the communication terminal 200), then as shown in step SS9, a non-reception message such as "receipt of recipe data CD is not currently being received" is sent to the registered external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300). In this way, the user US can also set up to refuse reception.

On the other hand, if the user agrees to connect to the external device and issues an instruction to acquire data in step SS6, the data acquisition unit 53 of the cooking appliance 1 acquires the recipe data CD from the external device via the communication unit 51. The acquired recipe data CD is stored in a specified "temporary storage unit" (not shown) in the recipe data storage unit 42 (step SS7).

In the next step SS8, the contents of the recipe data CD acquired from the external device, particularly the identification information 167, are displayed on the central display unit 16M. In addition, the audio notification unit 50 notifies the user of the fact that the data has been received, for example, by saying, "A hamburger recipe has been received."

In the first embodiment, the control device 40 is programmed to permit the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD if the input key 180, which is the selection unit for the voice input mode 2, is operated during the standby period in which the control device 40 waits for a command to start the heating operation after the main power switch 20 is turned on and power supply is started.

In other words, if the user US presses the input key 180 in step SS6, the step is judged as "Yes" and acquisition of the recipe data CD is permitted. However, several conditions must be satisfied before the recipe data CD is actually acquired by the control device 40, which will be explained in detail later.

Next, a description will be given of FIGS.
Fig. 19 is a flowchart showing the main input steps for the three cooking modes after the main power is turned on in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 20 is a flowchart 1 showing the input steps after the main power is turned on in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 21 is a flowchart 1 showing the input steps in the case of the linked cooking mode in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 22 is a flowchart 1 showing the input steps in the case of the combined cooking mode in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 23 is a flowchart 1 showing the input steps in the case of the single cooking mode in the cooking appliance 1.
Fig. 24 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of the cooking appliance 1 to acquire recipe data CD from the outside. Fig. 25 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of the cooking appliance 1 to acquire recipe data CD from the outside.

Figures 19 to 25 show the case of the aforementioned "voice input mode 1A." That is, in one input operation unit 15 (e.g., central operation unit 15M), the input key 107 (see Figure 13) is provided as the "combined key" among the multiple input keys.

Therefore, when the input mode is changed to the "voice input mode 1A" by the input key 107, the control pattern (state of the "voice input mode 1A") in which the input functions of the input keys other than the input key (combined key) 107 (input keys 108 and 109 in the central operation unit 15M) are disabled from that point on will be described.

Referring to FIG. 19 .
In FIG. 19, the blank reference numerals (107, 108, etc.) indicate input keys 107, 108, etc. to be operated in the following steps S2 to S15.
19, the main input keys are also displayed with outline characters, and the selection means 123 is also displayed with outline characters (numbers).
The range enclosed by the dashed line indicates the range in which voice input is possible in the "voice input mode 1" which is switched to when the input keys (multi-purpose keys) 107, 108, and 109 are "pressed and held."

Figure 19 shows the operational steps for starting cooking using the central operation unit 15M, which are slightly different from those for the left operation unit 15L and right operation unit 15R.

Steps S2 to S6 show the operation steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
Steps S7 to S11 show the operation steps in the combined cooking mode KM2.
Steps S12 to S15 show the operation steps in the single cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1 (central heating port 4C).

When the main power switch 20 is turned on, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display section 16M (step S1). In this case, the standby initial screen 16MH on the central display section 16M is the one shown in FIG.
Next, when the input key 107 is touched, the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected (step S2), and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (step S3).

Step S2A shows the process of acquiring recipe data CD from an external communication terminal 200, cloud server 300, etc.

At this stage, at least three cooking menus are displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 as described in FIG. 14, but by touching the input key 107 and rotating the dial-type selection means 123 by one step (a specified angle), different cooking menus can be displayed one after another (step S4).

In step S5, if the control conditions for one linked cooking menu are satisfactory, pressing input key 113 will allow transition to cooking step 1 of linked cooking mode KM1 (step S6).

As is clear from FIG. 19, if the input key (combined key) 107 is "pressed and held" in step S2, the control device 40 switches to a voice-based "input standby state," so that the range of conditions from step S4 to S5 can be input by voice. For example, the cooking menu and control conditions can be input as a set by the user US speaking, such as "Hamburg steak, preheat 180°C." Note that only the control conditions other than the food to be cooked may be input by voice, such as "heat 7 hours 10 minutes."

Continuing with the description, FIG.
In step S2, if the input key 108 is touched instead of the input key 107, the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected (step S7), and the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed (step S8).
Each time the input key 108 is touched once more (in step S9) (regardless of whether it is a "long press" or a "short press") to rotate the dial-type selection means 123 by one step (a predetermined angle), a different control menu (see Figs. 6 and 10) can be displayed (step S9). For example, control menus such as "warm", "manual microwave", and "pre-boil leafy vegetables" can be displayed in sequence in the center of the first area 22 of the second specific screen 16M1.

Step S7A shows the process of acquiring recipe data CD from an external communication terminal 200, cloud server 300, etc.

In step S9, if one of the control menus (e.g., "warm") displayed on the second specific screen 16M2 is satisfactory, the user can then press the input key 108 to move to an input step for selecting the control conditions (microwave output, heating time, etc.) displayed in the second area 23, and each time the dial-type selection means 123 is rotated by one step (a specified angle), different control conditions can be displayed one after another (step S10).

In step S10, if the control conditions for one composite cooking mode are satisfactory, pressing input key 113 will allow transition to cooking step 1 of composite cooking mode KM2 (step S11). Depending on the control menu, control conditions may be displayed in the third area 24 (see FIG. 6). In that case, after pressing the corresponding input key 109, the control conditions in the third area 24 can be selected by rotating the dial-type selection means 123 one step (a specified angle).

As is clear from FIG. 19, if the input key (combined key) 108 is "pressed and held" in step S7, the control device 40 switches to a voice "input standby state" in step S7, so that the range of conditions can be input by voice in steps S9 to S10. For example, the control menu (in this case, "warm") and the control conditions can be input as a set by the user US speaking, such as "warm 500 W". Note that only the control conditions may be input by voice, such as "500 W, time 10 minutes".

Continuing with the description, FIG.
In step S2, if the input key 109 is touched without touching the input key 107, without touching either the input key 107 in step S7 or the input key 108, the single cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1 is selected in the central heating port 4C managed by the central operation unit 15M (step S12), and the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed on the central display unit 16M (step S13).

Step S12A shows the process of acquiring recipe data CD from an external communication terminal 200, cloud server 300, etc.

In step S14, if one of the control menus (e.g., "Microwave Manual"; see FIG. 6) displayed (by default) in the first area 22 of the third specific screen 16M3 is acceptable, pressing the input key 113 will start the heating and cooking operation.

If a user wishes to select a control menu other than the one displayed in the first area 22 (see FIG. 6), in step S14, the user touches the input key 107 once (either a "short press" or a "long press"), and then rotates the dial-type selection means 123 by one step (a predetermined angle).
This allows the control menu displayed in the first area 22 to be changed to a desired control menu.

In addition, FIG. 19 also shows a case where the control conditions are displayed in the third area 24. In this case, the desired control condition can be displayed in the third area 24 by touching the input key 109 once (either a "short press" or a "long press" is acceptable) and then rotating the dial-type selection means 123.

In step S14, if one of the control menus (see FIG. 6) displayed on the third specific screen 16M3 is acceptable, the user then presses the input key 113 to finalize the control conditions (induction heating power, heating time, etc.) (step S15).

In step S15, if the control conditions for the single cooking mode KM3 are sufficient, the heating operation may be automatically started after a certain period of time (10 seconds) has elapsed without pressing an input key.

In addition, FIG. 19 also shows a case where the control conditions are displayed in the third area 24. In this case, the desired control condition can be displayed in the third area 24 by touching the input key 109 once (either a "short press" or a "long press" is acceptable) and then rotating the dial-type selection means 123.

As is clear from FIG. 19, if the input key (combined key) 109 is "pressed and held" at step S12, the control device 40 switches to a voice-based "input standby state," so that the control condition selection in the range from step S14 to S15 and the selection of the control condition can be input by voice. For example, from step S14, the user US can input a set of the control menu (in this case, "boil water") and the control condition, such as "boil water, heat level 6." Note that only the control condition may be input by voice.

You can also select timer cooking in steps S14 and S15 and input the timer setting time by voice. For example, when you reach step S14, you can say something like "heat 6 timer 10 minutes."

As is clear from FIG. 19, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has
The input operation unit 15 has three input keys 107 to 109 corresponding to three cooking modes,
The control device 40 validates the touch input of only one of the input keys 107 to 109, which is the earliest, and selects one of the heating cooking modes (the coordinated cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the single cooking mode KM3).

Furthermore, the configuration detects a "long press" input of the first input key among the three input keys 107 to 109 that is touched and switches to the voice input mode. The configuration is characterized in that the touch input of only the first input key is validated, and during the period from when the input of the cooking menu, control menu, and control conditions (heat, heating time, etc.) required to start cooking in the heat cooking mode is completed until the start of heat cooking is performed with input key 113, the input process for other cooking modes is not started.

In other words, for the three heating cooking modes (cooperative cooking mode KM1, composite cooking mode KM2, and single cooking mode KM3), only one of the input keys 107, 108, and 109 that is touched first is accepted by the control device 40, and the other input keys are placed in a state in which input commands cannot be accepted.

Therefore, for example, if input key 107 is touched and then pressed and held down to switch to voice input mode, other input keys (e.g., 108, 109) cannot be used for input. However, start key 113 maintains its input function until cooking begins. Also, once cooking begins, stop key 114 maintains its input function.

Therefore, when the voice input mode is started by any one of the input keys 107, 108, 109, it becomes impossible to select other cooking modes or control modes by the "touch input keys", and control conditions are not inadvertently input by voice input.
When the voice input mode is started by any one of the input keys 107, 108, and 109, if the stop key 114 is pressed once or more before the start key 113 is pressed, all input settings made up to that point are cancelled.

Furthermore, when the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is entered using one input key (e.g., 107) in the voice input mode, the voice input mode is released when the start key 113 is pressed to start cooking. After that, the voice input mode is not set again until all cooking steps are completed.
Therefore, when the user US subsequently selects another cooking mode by performing a touch operation, confusion does not occur. In addition, a situation does not occur in which a voice input for setting another cooking mode is mistakenly received and the cooking mode being performed is changed.

Next, FIG. 20 will be described.
In FIG. 20, the blank reference characters (107, 108, 109) indicate the input keys (107, 108, 109) operated in steps SM3, SM4 and SM8.

In FIG. 20, step SM1 performs processing equivalent to the processing of steps ST2 and ST3 in FIG. 17. That is, the central display unit 16M is activated, and the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed. An abnormality determination is performed, and if no abnormality is found, a message is displayed stating "There are no abnormalities, so cooking can begin." Then, the standby initial screen 16MH and the audio notification unit 51 provide a notification and audio guidance to encourage the user to select a heating method.

Furthermore, at this step SM1, if the cooking appliance 1 is set to transmit startup information to the communication terminal 200 or cloud server 300, the startup information (a type of operating status data OS) is wirelessly transmitted from the communication unit 51 at this stage. Note that the standby initial screen 16MH also displays usage precautions for the user US, which will be explained in detail later.

In the next step SM2, the input functions of all input operation units 15M, 15L, 15R are enabled to prepare for touch input operation of each input key (107 to 109, etc.). In addition, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 9) possessed by the input operation unit 15 starts measuring the elapsed time. Note that while FIG. 9 shows an example of the central operation unit 15M, the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L have the same configuration as the central operation unit 15M. Therefore, they have a configuration equivalent to the time measurement unit 15T.

In the next step SM3, the coordinated cooking mode KM1 is selected. In step SM4, the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected. In step SM8, the single cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1 is selected.

First, in step SM3, it is determined whether or not the input key 107 has been touched, and if it has been operated, the process proceeds to the route A1 shown in FIG. 20 and FIG.
If there is no touch operation in step SM3, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM4. If there is a touch operation on the input key 108 in step SM4, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the route B1 shown in Fig. 20 and Fig. 22.

If there is no touch operation in step SM4, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM8. If there is a touch operation on the input key 109 in step SM8, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the route C1 shown in Figs. 20 and 23.

In step SM8 shown in FIG. 20, if no touch operation has been performed, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM5. In this step SM5, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 9) determines whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SM3.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SM5 that the preset time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM6, where a process to automatically shut off the main power supply (hereinafter referred to as "automatic shutoff process 1") is performed. Then, the series of operations ends (SM7). In this way, if no input operation is performed, the main power switch 20 will automatically open when the time limit (e.g., 30 minutes) is exceeded.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the operation after the input key 107 is touched in step SM3.
When the input key 107 is touched, if the touch operation is a "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination section 15C (see FIG. 9) of the central operation section 15M.

Then, the determination in step SM40 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM41. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step SM50.
Step SM41 is a step for determining whether or not the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied. If these permission conditions are not satisfied, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM47). The denial process is the process of step ST8 described in FIG. 17.

If the determination in step SM41 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM42.
In step SM42, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed. In the center of the first area 22 of the first specific screen 16M1, identification information 167 of one cooking menu item set as default, "Hamburger" is displayed (see FIG. 7).

After this, to select another cooking menu (e.g. roast beef), the input key 107 is further touched and the selection means 123 is rotated.

In FIG. 21, in step SM43, the timer 15T (see FIG. 9) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM43, if voice input is made from the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 8), step SM44 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM45.

By the way, at the stage of step SM43, the control device 40 has already switched to "voice input mode 1A". Therefore, if the input keys 108 and 109 are touched after the point of time of step SM43, the input of the input keys 108 and 109 is not accepted by the control device 40 due to the "voice input mode 1A".

In other words, unless voice input is performed, step SM44 will not become "Yes," and it is not possible to proceed to step SM46 for input completion. If "voice input mode 1B" is set, touch input can continue as described above. Also, exceptionally, the voice input control program may be modified so that "voice input mode" is released if touch input (in this case, a "short press") is performed again on the input key 107, whose touch input function is still maintained at this point.

In this way, in this embodiment 1, immediately after the input key 107 is "pressed and held," the mode switches to voice input mode 1A, and voice input mode 1A continues automatically thereafter. However, voice input mode 1A is released when the heating operation starts (in other words, it is released when the start key 114 is touched).

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM46. In step SM46, a determination is made as to whether input has been completed, and if step SM46 is determined to be "Yes", the process goes into a standby state waiting for input from the start key 114 (A21).

On the other hand, if steps SM44 and SM46 are "No", the process returns to step SM44 and waits for voice input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM45 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM45 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM48 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing 1 shown in step SM6 of Fig. 20, and refers to returning the display from the first specific screen 16M1 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying that the input has not been made properly, or notifying by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process may proceed to step SM5 and then to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Furthermore, steps SM50 and after will be described with reference to FIG.
Step SM50 is a step for determining whether or not the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied. If "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are not satisfied, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM56). The denial process is the process of step ST8 described in FIG. 17.

If the determination in step SM50 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM51.
In step SM51, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.
After this first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the input key 107 is further touched once to select a specific cooking menu (e.g., roast beef), and the selection means 123 is operated (may be operated multiple times).

In FIG. 21, in step SM52, the timer 15T (see FIG. 9) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM52, if the user US inputs, for example, using the input keys 107 or the selection means 123 via the audio signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 8), step SM53 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM54.

By the way, at the stage of step SM53, the control device 40 has already switched to touch input mode. Therefore, if the input key 107 is touch-inputted after step SM52, the input of the input keys 107 to 109 is accepted by the control device 40 due to the touch input mode. In other words, as long as it is a touch input, step SM53 will be "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM46 where the input is complete. However, as an exception, if the input key 107 is touch-inputted again (in this case, "long press"), the touch input mode may be released and changed back to "voice input mode 1".

In this way, in this embodiment 1, the touch input mode is maintained unless the input key 107 is "pressed and held," and the touch input mode continues automatically thereafter. The touch input mode is automatically released when the heating operation starts.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM55. Then, a determination is made as to whether the input has been completed. If the determination in step SM55 is "Yes", the process goes into a standby state waiting for input from the start key 113 (A22).

On the other hand, if steps SM53 and SM55 are "No", the process returns to step SM53 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM54 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM54 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM57 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 20, and refers to returning the display from the first specific screen 16M1 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying that the input has not been made properly, or notifying by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Next, we will refer to FIG.
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the operation after the input key 108 is touched in step SM4.
When the input key 108 is touched, if the touch operation is a "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination section 15C (see FIG. 9) of the central operation section 15M.

Then, the determination in step SM60 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM61. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step SM70.
Step SM61 is a step for determining whether or not "permission condition 3" is satisfied.
The "permission condition 3" here is different from the permission conditions 1 and 2 of the combined cooking mode (see FIG. 17). The "permission condition 3" in the combined cooking mode is when the latest temperature of the heating chamber 6 is checked by the temperature sensor group 30 and is, for example, 100°C. This is because it exceeds the temperature detection range of the "warm" mode (90°C or less).

If "permission condition 3" is not met, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM67). Note that the denial process is a process in which a message such as "The heating chamber is too hot to cook" is displayed on the initial standby screen 16MH, or a similar notification is given by the audio notification unit 50. Note that when cooking is performed in the heating chamber 6 using the third heating means HM3, the heating chamber 6 may remain hot for a while due to residual heat even after the cooking is completed.

If the determination in step SM61 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM62.
In step SM62, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.
After the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed, the input key 107 is further touched (or may be touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (e.g., warming), and the dial-type selection means 123 is rotated to select the control menu.

In FIG. 22, in step SM63, the timer 15T (see FIG. 9) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM63, if voice input is made from the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 8), step SM64 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM65.

By the way, at the stage of step SM63, the control device 40 has already switched to voice input mode 1. Therefore, even if the input keys 108 and 109 are touched after the point of step SM63, the input of the input keys 108 and 109 is not accepted by the control device 40 due to the voice input mode (because it is set to the "voice input mode 1A"). In other words, unless there is voice input, step SM64 does not become "Yes", and the process does not proceed to step SM66 for input completion. As an exception, if the input key 107 is touched again (in this case, a "short press"), the "voice input mode 1" may be changed so that it is released. On the other hand, if the "voice input mode 1B" is set, the touch input of the input keys 108 and 109 is accepted by the control device 40.

In this way, in this embodiment 1, immediately after the input key 107 is "pressed and held," the mode switches to voice input mode 1, but voice input mode 1 is automatically released when a command to start cooking is given (by touching the start key 114).

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM66. In step SM65, a determination is made as to whether input has been completed, and if step SM66 returns a "Yes" result, the process goes into standby mode, waiting for input from the start key 114 (B21).

On the other hand, if steps SM64 and SM66 are "No", the process returns to step SM64 and waits for voice input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM65 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM65 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM68 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 20, and refers to returning the display from the second specific screen 16M2 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message that the input has not been made properly, or notifying the user by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Next, steps SM60 and after will be described with reference to FIG.
Step SM70 is a step for determining whether or not the above-mentioned "permission condition 3" is satisfied. If permission condition 3 is not satisfied, a denial process is carried out at this stage (step SM76). The "denial process" in this case is the same as the denial process of step SM67.

If the determination in step SM70 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM71.
In step SM71, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.
The state at the time when the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed is shown, for example, in Fig. 6. After that, in order to select a specific control menu (e.g., warm), the input key 107 is further touched and the dial type selection means 123 is rotated.

In this way, in this embodiment 1, immediately after selecting the composite cooking mode KM2 or in a control menu (e.g., warm), the input key 107 is "long pressed" to switch to voice input mode 1, but voice input mode 1 does not continue automatically thereafter, but is released when the heating operation starts. Note that if the same input key 107 is "short pressed," the voice input mode 1 may be released at this point.

In FIG. 22, in step SM72, the timer 15T (see FIG. 9) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded. If touch input is performed using the input keys 108 and 109 after step SM72, step SM73 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM74.

By the way, at the stage of step SM72, the control device 40 has already switched to touch input mode. Therefore, if the input key 108 or 109 is touch-inputted after this point in time of step SM72, the input of the input key 107, 108 or 109 is accepted by the control device 40 since it is in touch input mode. In other words, as long as it is touch input, step SM73 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM75 where input is complete. However, as an exception, if the input key 107 is touch-inputted again (in this case, "long press"), the touch input mode may be released and changed back to "voice input mode 1".

In this way, in this embodiment 1, the touch input mode of the composite cooking mode KM2 is maintained unless the input key 108 is "pressed and held," and the touch input mode continues automatically thereafter. This touch input mode is automatically released when the heating operation starts. Therefore, the normal touch input mode is restored.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM75. Then, a determination is made as to whether input has been completed. If the determination in step SM75 is "Yes", the process goes into a standby state waiting for input from the input key 113 (B22).

On the other hand, if the results of steps SM73 and SM75 are "No", the process returns to step SM73 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM74 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM74 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM77 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 20, and refers to returning the display from the second specific screen 16M2 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message that the input has not been made properly, or notifying the user by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Next, we will refer to FIG.
FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the operation following the touch operation of the input key 109 in step SM8 of FIG.

When the touch operation of the input key 109 is a "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination unit 15C (see FIG. 9) of the central operation unit 15M. Note that FIG. 9 shows an example of the central operation unit 15M, but since the left operation unit 15L has the same configuration as that shown in FIG. 9, the left operation unit 15L or the right operation unit 15R basically performs the same operation.

Then, the determination in step SM80 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM81. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step SM90.
Step SM81 is a step for determining whether or not "permission condition 4" is satisfied.
The "permission condition 4" here is different from the permission condition 1 and permission condition 2 of the coordinated cooking mode KM1 and the above-mentioned "permission condition 3." The "permission condition 4" in the independent cooking mode KM3 is, for example, when the latest temperature of the top plate 3 is checked by the temperature sensor group 30 and is a high temperature, for example, exceeding 80°C or 100°C. This is because, when the temperature of the object N to be heated is detected in a non-contact manner and induction heating control is performed, a high temperature from the start of the heating operation can hinder accurate temperature control and induction heating control.

If "permission condition 4" is not met, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM87). Note that the denial process is a process in which a message such as "The top plate is too hot to cook" is displayed on the initial standby screen 16MH, or a similar notification is given by the audio notification unit 50. Note that when induction heating cooking is performed, the top plate 3 may remain hot for a while even after cooking is completed.

If the determination in step SM81 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM82.
In step SM82, the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed.
The third specific screen 16M3 will be described in detail later. After the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed, the input key 107 may be touched once to select a specific control menu (e.g., preheat), and then the dial type selection means 123 may be rotated.

At this stage, the mode has already been switched to "voice input mode 1", so in the next step SM83, the timer 15T (see FIG. 9) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. If, after step SM83, voice input is made by the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 8), step SM84 becomes "Yes", and the program proceeds to the next step SM85.
For example, if the user US utters “preheat 200° C.”, the voice signal receiving unit 56 converts this voice input into an electrical signal and inputs it to the voice signal analyzing unit 58 .

In step SM85, it is determined whether the time limit TY has been exceeded, and if not, the process proceeds to step SM86.
In step SM86, it is determined whether the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM86 is "Yes", the induction heating operation is automatically started within a certain time (for example, 10 seconds). In other words, in the first heating means HM1 using the central operation unit 15M (in the case of the single cooking mode HM1), no special input key operation is required to start heating, and the heating operation is started directly (C21). Note that the heating operation may be started when the start key 113 is touched.

On the other hand, if steps SM84 and SM86 are "No", the process returns to step SM84 and waits for voice input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM85 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM85 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM88 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 20, and refers to returning the display from the third specific screen 16M3 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message that the input has not been made properly, or notifying the user by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Next, steps SM80 and after will be described with reference to FIG.
Step SM90 is a step for determining whether or not the above-mentioned "permission condition 4" is satisfied. If permission condition 4 is not satisfied, a denial process is carried out at this stage (step SM96). The "denial process" in this case is the same as the denial process of step SM87.

If the determination in step SM90 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM91.
In step SM91, the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed.
After the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed, the input key 17 is further touched once to select a specific control menu (e.g., preheat), and then the dial type selection means 123 is rotated.

In FIG. 23, in step SM92, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 9) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded.

At this stage, the "touch input mode" is in effect, so in the next step SM93, the timer 15T (see FIG. 9) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded.

The input key 107 is touched once to select a control menu (e.g., preheat) using the dial-type selection means 123. Control conditions such as preheat temperature can be input by touching the input key 107 once and then rotating the selection means 123.

In this way, when the user US performs a touch input or an input using the dial type selection means 123, step SM93 becomes "Yes", and if the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds from step SM94 to the next step SM95.
For example, if the user US touches the input key 107 once to input the conditions of "preheat" and "200°C" and then inputs them using the dial-type selection means 123, the left operation unit 15L converts this input into an electrical signal and inputs it to the input signal analysis unit 52 (see FIG. 8).

Note that even if the input key 109 is "pressed and held" at step SM95, the stage for switching to voice input mode (step SM80) has already passed, and at this stage of step SM95, even if the input key is "pressed and held," it is not possible to switch to voice input mode 1.

In this way, in this embodiment 1, immediately after the first "long press" of the input key 109 to select the single cooking mode HM3 of the first heating means HM1, the mode switches to voice input mode 1, and voice input mode 1 continues automatically thereafter.

In other words, once the input key 109 is "pressed and held," voice input mode 1 is maintained regardless of any subsequent operation of that voice input key (if it is set to the above-mentioned "voice input mode 1B"). Even if the input key 109 is "pressed and held" again (twice in succession), voice input mode 1 remains.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded in the determination of step SM94, the process proceeds to step SM95. Then, a determination is made as to whether the input has been completed. If the determination of step SM95 is "Yes", the induction heating operation will automatically start within a certain period of time (e.g., 10 seconds). In other words, in the first heating means HM1 using the left operation unit 16L (in the case of single cooking mode HM1), no special input key operation is required to start heating, and the process proceeds directly to the heating operation (C22). Note that the process may be modified so that the heating operation will start only when the start key 113 is touched.

On the other hand, if steps SM93 and SM95 are "No", the process returns to step SM93 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM94 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM94 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM97 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 20, and refers to returning the display from the third specific screen 16M3 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message that the input has not been made properly, or notifying the user by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Next, we will explain FIG. 24.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of the cooking appliance 1 for acquiring recipe data CD from the outside.

In Fig. 24, step SL1 performs a process corresponding to step SM1 in Fig. 20. In the next step SL2, a process corresponding to step SM2 in Fig. 20 is performed.
Step SL3 is a process corresponding to step SS5 of connecting and notifying an external connection described in Fig. 18. That is, this is a step for the purpose of requesting the user US to confirm in advance whether or not to transmit a signal requesting provision of recipe data CD to the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 that has been registered and set in advance.

As described above, it is also possible to automatically execute an external connection from the stage of step SL3 (SS5) (if previously set by the function setting key 115 described above).
If the control device 40 has acquired the recipe data CD, the next step SL4 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SL5.

The next step SL5 is a process for determining whether the received recipe data CD meets the predefined permission conditions. As described above, for example, in the coordinated cooking mode KM1, anything that does not meet "permission condition 1" or "permission condition 2" is not permitted as a cooking menu (see FIG. 21). Also, in the combined cooking mode KM2, a determination is made as to whether a specific "permission condition 3" is met. Note that permission condition 3 is the same as that described in step SM61 of FIG. 22. Furthermore, for the first heating means HM1, the previously described "permission condition 4" must be met (see step SM81 of FIG. 23).

If it is determined in step SL5 that the permission conditions are not met, as explained in step ST8 of FIG. 17, the communication unit 51 transmits a signal (data) to the outside to inform the outside that the recipe data CD cannot be received (step SL9). Note that while FIG. 17 shows the case of the coordinated cooking mode KM1, such a "non-reception message" is also transmitted in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM3.

If the permission conditions are met, the determined recipe data CD is stored as valid data in a predetermined storage area of the recipe data storage unit 42 (step SL6).
The identification information 160, 167, 168, 169 and control conditions (heat, heating time, target temperature, etc.) included in the recipe data CD are displayed on the central display section 16M. For example, in the case of the combined cooking mode KM1, they are displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SL6).

The next step SL7 is a step for modifying the control conditions. For example, in the linked cooking mode KM1, the control conditions (e.g., heating time, target heating temperature, heat, etc.) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 can be changed as appropriate by operating the dial-type selection means 123 of the central operation unit 15M. Note that since the recipe data CD is acquired on a cooking menu basis, it is already determined that the cooking menu is a specific cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak), and this cannot be changed to another cooking menu (e.g., roast beef).

If you want to modify the control conditions, for example in the coordinated cooking mode KM1, you can simply input the appropriate changes using the central operation unit 15M (step SL10). In this case, you can select either "voice input mode 1" or "voice input mode 2," and you can also input by voice.

If it is determined in step SL4 that recipe data CD has not been received, the process proceeds to step SL8. In this step SL8, it is determined whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SL4. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SL11. Step SL11 is "automatic shutoff process 1" which automatically shuts off the main power supply, similar to step SM6 described in FIG. 20. Note that the time limit TX of this step SL8 and the time limit TX of step SM6 described in FIG. 20 do not have to be the same time, and different times may be set.

Next, we will explain FIG. 25.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of the cooking appliance 1 for acquiring recipe data CD from the outside.
FIG. 25 shows the operation when a (dedicated) input key 180 for selecting the voice input mode is used.

In FIG. 25, step SS5 is the same as that explained in FIG. 18, so a duplicate explanation will be omitted.
Step SS10 is a step for judging whether or not the input key 180 of the voice input mode 2 is operated. If the input key 180 is pressed once, the answer is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SS11. If the input key 180 is not operated, the process proceeds to the normal touch input mode (step SS15).

If the data acquisition unit 53 has acquired the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, step SS11 becomes "Yes".
If it is determined in step SS11 that the recipe data CD has not been received, the process proceeds to step SS16. In step SS16, it is determined whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SS11. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SS17. Step SS17 is an "automatic shutoff process 1" that automatically shuts off the main power supply, similar to step SM6 described in FIG. 20. Note that the time limit TX in step SS17 and the time limit TX in step SM6 described in FIG. 39 do not have to be the same time, and different times may be set.

The contents of the recipe data CD received in step SS11 are checked to see if they satisfy the "permission conditions" described above (see step SL5 in FIG. 24), and if they do, step SS12 becomes "Yes."

If the permission conditions are not met, as described in step SL9 of FIG. 24, the communication unit 51 transmits a signal (data) to the outside to inform the outside that the recipe data CD cannot be received (SS18).

If the permission conditions are satisfied, the determined recipe data CD is stored in a predetermined storage area of the recipe data storage unit 42 as regular data.
Furthermore, the identification information 160, 167, 168, 169, etc. and the control conditions included in the recipe data are displayed on the central display unit 16. For example, when the recipe data CD is the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS13).

The control conditions (e.g., heating time, target heating temperature, heat, etc.) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 can be changed as appropriate by voice input acquired via the voice signal receiving unit 56 of the input operation unit 15 (steps SS14, SS15).

When "voice input mode 2" is selected by input key 180, "voice input mode 2" continues until a heating operation for one cooking menu is started. It does not switch to "touch input mode" during the input stage. This is because switching during the input process may cause confusion in the operation of the user US.

If you wish to switch to touch input mode, simply press input key 180 again at any stage. The touch input mode will be restored from the point at which it is pressed. Note that if, for example, input key 107 is "pressed and held" after returning to touch input mode, it will switch to "voice input mode 1". Therefore, in voice input mode 1 (set to voice input mode 1B), if, for example, input key 108 is operated for input, input is possible because the input function of that input key has not been disabled.

Next, reference will be made to FIG. 26 and FIG.
Fig. 26 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of the control device 40 when the cooking appliance 1 is switched to voice input mode 1. Note that Fig. 26 shows the case of the coordinated cooking mode KM1, but the same is basically true for the other cooking modes.

In FIG. 26, step SS20 indicates the time when the input mode of the control device 40 is switched to voice input mode 1.
In the next step SS21, the voice notification unit 50 and the central display unit 16M notify that the acceptance of voice input has begun. At this point, the state of the central display unit 16M is, for example, a mark 179A indicating that the mode has been switched to voice input mode, which is displayed as characters or the like in the second area 23 or the third area 24 of the central operation unit 15M (see FIG. 37). At the same time, information indicating that voice input is being accepted is displayed as auxiliary information 179.

In the next step SS22, the voice signal analysis unit 58 transitions to an input standby state in which it receives voice commands from the user US. In addition, a time measurement unit (not shown) inside the control device 40 starts measuring the elapsed time.

The voice input information uttered by the user US is acquired by the voice signal receiving unit 56 via a microphone (not shown). The voice signal receiving unit 56 converts the acquired voice information into a predetermined voice signal and transmits it to the voice signal analyzing unit 58 (step SS23).

The audio signal analysis unit 56 analyzes the received audio signal (step SS24), and displays the input content on the central display unit 16M (first specific screen 16M1).
FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of the central display section 16M.
As shown in Fig. 27, text such as "Please select the left or right IH cooker" is displayed in the range of the second area 23 and the third area 24 (step SS25). Also, a voice notification is given.

In step SS25, if the input information is insufficient, the voice notification unit 50 may further guide the user by voice, such as "Please specify the preheat temperature." Alternatively, the range of specific control conditions may be notified, such as "We recommend a preheat temperature of 200°C. Please specify the temperature."

If the input of the control conditions required to start the heating operation is insufficient, the process returns to step SS23. Before returning to step SS23, the audio notification unit 50 indicates the control conditions that are insufficient to be input and prompts the user to input them (not shown).

When the heating control unit 43 determines that input of the control conditions required to start the heating operation has been completed (step SS26), the process proceeds to step SS27. In step SS27, since voice input has been completed, a notice is given that voice input mode 1 will be released, and it is recommended that the start key 113 be touched (step SS27). Note that when the start key 113 is touched, voice input mode 1 is released.

On the other hand, if no voice command is received in step SS23, the process proceeds to step SS28. In step SS28, it is determined whether the time elapsed since step SS22 exceeds a predetermined time limit TZ. If the time limit TZ has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SS23. However, if the time limit TZ (e.g., 5 minutes) has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SS29. Step SS29 is "automatic shutoff process 2" similar to step SM6 in FIG. 20. Note that this "automatic shutoff process 2" is a series of processes in which, in the state of the first specific screen 16M1, the voice notification unit 50 issues an alarm to the user US, and then the screen automatically switches to the standby initial screen 16MH, and then the main power switch 20 is automatically opened. This prevents the input process from being left unattended for a long time for some reason, ensuring safety.

Next, we will explain Figure 28.
FIG. 28 shows the display contents of the central display section 16M corresponding to each of the main operation steps after the main power switch 20 is turned on.

Referring now to Fig. 28, when the main power switch 20 is turned off, the central display unit 16M is not activated and does not display any information.
When the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the control device 40 performs self-diagnosis to check for abnormalities, etc., as described above, and then displays "Display Screen 1," which is one display form of the initial standby screen 16MH in Figure 28, on the central display unit 16M.

In the display screen 1 shown in FIG. 28, 60A is a display message notifying the user that the power is on. 60B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for directing the user to the recipe data providing server 301, a dedicated recipe posting site, via the network NW. 60C is text explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code (hereinafter, "two-dimensional information explanation text").

When the two-dimensional code 60B is optically read by the communication terminal 200, it can be guided and connected to the recipe data providing server 301 that holds information on various cooking recipes. This two-dimensional information explanation 60C and the display text 60A are a type of "common information during standby" 60N.

After the display screen 1 in FIG. 28 is displayed, the display screen 2A or 2B may be automatically displayed.
28 is displayed, the display screen 2C is automatically displayed. In the display screen 2C, a recommendation 60H is displayed to prompt the user US to perform an input operation to select a heating source.
28, the display screen 2D shown in FIG. 13 is always displayed. The display screen 2D may be displayed immediately after the display screen 1.

On the display screen 2A, the text display "Caution: Bumping" is one of the warning displays 60E. "Bumping" refers to the phenomenon in which, when a viscous food (liquid) such as curry or stew is being heated, the inside of the food becomes overheated above the boiling point, causing sudden, violent boiling. As steam escapes from the heated liquid, hot droplets may fly off, which can be dangerous. The timing and cause of bumping is said to be the introduction of foreign matter or impact from outside. For this reason, when a metal pot or the like containing food is placed on the top plate 3 and induction heated, caution is displayed when stirring the food. The information displayed in this warning is one type of "common information during standby" 60N.

The four display screens shown in FIG. 28, display screen 1 and display screens 2A to 2C, are called the "common screen" or "standby initial screen" 16MH. Note that forms other than these four may also be included in the common screen 16MH.

On display screen 2B, 60E is a warning display that warns the user that the inside of heating chamber 6 is at a high temperature and to avoid inadvertent contact. If control device 40 detects that heating chamber 6 has not yet cooled down sufficiently after oven cooking has been performed in heating chamber 6, the display screen will automatically switch to this state.

Although display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed simultaneously, they may be displayed alternately at intervals of a few seconds to alert users to both the bumping and high temperature indications. In addition, the audio notification unit 50 may also be used to simultaneously output the alerts displayed on display screens 2A and 2B in audio format.

In the display screen 2C of Fig. 28, 60P is the above-mentioned acquisition operation support information. As shown in Fig. 28, the cooking appliance 1 acquires recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 or the like, and stores the acquired data in the recipe data storage unit 42 (see Fig. 8). The user US can recognize that this can also be acquired by voice by pressing the input key 180 (for selecting voice input mode 2) (the voice notification unit 50 may notify the user by voice in conjunction with this display).

As is clear from display screen 1 to display screen 2A to 2C in Figure 28, the display of these various pieces of information, including the acquisition operation support information 60P, is performed using the entire display screen. In other words, rather than displaying it partially in any of the first area 22 to third area 24 described above, in order to secure as large a display area as possible, the first area 22 to third area 24 are displayed as an integrated display so that they cannot be distinguished, and the user US sees it as being displayed in the entire central display section 16M.

While the central display unit 16M is shown in FIG. 28, the left display unit 16L and right display unit 16R also display information similar to that displayed in the central display unit 16M. In other words, when the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the control device 40 performs a self-diagnosis to check for abnormalities, etc., as described above, and then causes the central display unit 16M, left display unit 16L, and right display unit 16R to simultaneously display "Display Screen 1," which is one display form of the initial standby screen 16MH in FIG. 28.

Next, we will explain FIG. 29.
FIG. 29 is an enlarged plan view illustrating the operation of the left display section 16L of the cooking appliance 1. As shown in FIG.
Fig. 29 shows the third specific screen 16L3 on the left display section 16L for the single cooking mode KM3. This Fig. 29 is displayed when the input key 107L (not shown) is operated after step SS4 in Fig. 18. The input key 107L corresponds to the input key 107 on the central operation section 15M. In other words, the voice input mode can be started by "long pressing".

Next, when the dial-type selection means 123L (not shown) arranged on the left operation unit 15L is rotated, each time it is rotated a predetermined angle, a control menu to be implemented by the left heating port 4L is displayed one by one on the left display unit 16L. As shown in the display screen 3A of FIG. 29, the user can separately set the control menu to be displayed first (default setting) by using the input keys 115, such as "Keep Warm," "Deep Fry" on display screen 3B, or "Preheat" on display screen 3C. The dial-type selection means 123L (not shown) corresponds to the dial-type selection means 123 of the central operation unit 15M, and has the same function.

Furthermore, by rotating the dial-type selection means 123L (not shown) after operating the input key 107L (not shown), the display of the control menu changes one by one (such as keep warm, fry, preheat, etc.) in response to the rotation operation. One can be selected from multiple control menus.

The control menus that can be selected for the left heating port 4L (in induction heating single cooking mode KM3) are, for example, "keep warm," "boil water," "stewing," "deep frying (automatic cooking)," "preheating," etc. The operating time, heat, or operating pattern of the left IH coil 9L differs for each control menu.

Display screen 3A in Fig. 29 shows a case where the "keep warm" control menu is selected. Display screen 3B shows a case where the "fry" control menu is selected. Display screen 3C shows a case where the "preheat" control menu is selected.
The auxiliary information 179A is displayed adjacent to the display portion of the name of each control menu on the third specific screen 16M3 after switching to the voice input mode. Therefore, it is not displayed when the mode is not the voice input mode.

When "Keep Warm" is selected from the control menu (in induction heating single cooking mode KM3) using the central IH coil 9M that is responsible for the central heating port 4C on the central display unit 16M, a screen similar to the display screen 3A shown in FIG. 29 is displayed. In this case, the central display unit 16M has a display form similar to that of the display screen 3A, and this screen is called the "third specific screen" 16M3.

Next, FIG. 30 will be described.
30 illustrates the operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 from when the cooking appliance 1 is started to immediately before cooking begins. This is the case where the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected.

In FIG. 30, when the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed and the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display unit 16M, it is determined whether recipe data CD for the collaborative cooking mode KM1 has been acquired from an external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300) (step SU2).

In step SU3, the control device 40 compares the latest state of the cooking device 1 and determines whether the state satisfies permission condition 1 and permission condition 2.

When it is determined that permission conditions 1 and 2 are simultaneously satisfied (SU6), the identification information 167 contained in the recipe data CD acquired from the external device (communication terminal 200 or cloud server 300) is displayed on the central display unit 16M. In this case, the identification information 167 (e.g., "Name: Hamburger") is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SU7).

In the step SU7, the identification information 167 (for example, "Name: Hamburger") is displayed as shown in FIG.
Operation support information 170 is also displayed. This prompts the user US to press the start key 113 to start cooking. The audio notification unit 50 also notifies the user, for example, "Press the start key to start cooking" (step SU8).

After step SU7, if the user US presses the input key 109 once, the food component display screen 16M1A shown in FIG. 32(A) is displayed. If the user presses the input key 109 once again, the food component display screen 16M1B shown in FIG. 32(B) is displayed.

In addition, in step SU8, the user US may set the control conditions (e.g., heat value, heating time, etc.) as appropriate. In this case, by pressing the input key 180 dedicated to the voice input mode, the control conditions can be input by voice.

In addition, if the "function setting" using input key 115 has been set in advance to not display the food component display screen 16M1A and the food component display screen 16M1B, the setting of the control conditions (e.g., heat value) can be performed using input key 109.

On the other hand, the case where the control device 40 compares the latest state of the cooking device 1 with that of the step SU3 and determines that the state does not satisfy permission condition 1 and permission condition 2 (step SU4) will be described.

The contents of the standby initial screen 16HM in the central display section 16M are partially changed, and a text message is displayed indicating that the recipe data CD acquired from the external device cannot be executed with the current cooking device 1. The same message is also audibly notified by the audio notification section 50 (step SU5). Then, the process returns to step SU1. This operation corresponds to the operation of step ST8 described in FIG. 17.

Next, we will explain Figure 31.
FIG. 31 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit 15M and the central display unit 16M, which are the same as those described in FIG.

In FIG. 31, 173 is an external recipe identification section that indicates that the recipe data CD is obtained from an external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300). The words "Received recipe" are displayed in text, and it is easy to see that the cooking menu (for cooking hamburger steak) displayed on this first specific screen 16M1 is a recipe obtained from outside.

In FIG. 31, the individual light-emitting element 21M4 corresponding to the input key 113 is in a standby state in which the heating operation can be started at any time. To indicate this, it is flashing to prompt the user to operate the input key 113. The dashed circle indicates that the individual light-emitting element 21M4 is flashing.

In FIG. 31, star-shaped figures are drawn at the positions of the individual light-emitting units 21M2 and 21M3. These figures indicate that the input functions of the input keys (108, 109) located in front of the individual light-emitting unit 21M4 are active, and that input commands can be given by touching them at this point.

In FIG. 31, the individual light-emitting element 21M2 corresponding to the input key 108 is illuminated. In other words, the user US can select either the heating element specification element 116L, which selects cooking using the left heating port 4L, or the heating element specification element 116R, which selects cooking using the right heating port 4R.

The recipe data CD acquired from the external device is displayed preferentially on the first specific screen 16M1 by displaying the external recipe identification section 173. In other words, the identification information 167 of the received recipe data CD is displayed at the center position in the front-to-rear direction of the first area 22 of the first specific screen 16M1. Therefore, by pressing the input key 113 as shown in FIG. 31, cooking in the linked cooking mode KM1 can be started immediately.

As described above, there are two types of recipe data CD obtained from an external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300): one in which cooking is limited to specific heating parts (right heating port 4R, center heating port 4C, left heating port 4L), and one in which cooking can be performed by specifying the range of heating parts that can be used according to the user US's wishes. Therefore, even when the user US uses recipe data CD obtained from an external device, usability is not impaired.

Next, we will explain Figure 32.
FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the central display section 16M in the collaborative cooking mode KM1, and is an example in which standard ingredients and nutritional ingredients for "hamburger steak," one of the cooking menus, are displayed.

When the user US issues a command to display either the food ingredients or the nutritional ingredients by voice input at step SU7A in FIG. 30, or when the input key 109 is touched at the stage where the operational support information 170 is displayed (see FIG. 31), the first specific screen 16M1 temporarily switches to the display screen of FIG. 32(A) and FIG. 32(B).

The display screen in FIG. 32(A) is the food component display screen 16M1A described above, as explained in FIG. 31, and the display screen in FIG. 30(B) is the nutritional component display screen 16M1B.

The food component display screen 16M1A and nutritional component display screen 16M1B automatically return to the original state of the first specific screen 16M1 after a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed.
Alternatively, the display program of the control device 40 stipulates that if the user US gives any command by voice input or if the input key 109 is operated once more within the specified period of time (10 seconds), the original state of the first specific screen 16M1 will be restored.

Next, we will refer to FIG.
FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking steps of a cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (hereinafter referred to as the "cooperative cooking menu") and the operations of the input operation units (the central operation unit 15M and the right operation unit 15R).
In the example of Figure 33, the collaborative cooking menu is composed of three cooking steps: cooking step 1, cooking step 2, and cooking step 3.
Cooking step 1 is an example in which the first heating means HM1 is used.

In the recipe data CD, in the example of Fig. 33, the following conditions are defined in a predetermined computer program format: Control conditions for heat power, etc. may also be defined.
(1) Waiting for input from the input key 113 to start induction heating operation at the right heating port 4R (or the left heating port 4L).
(2) When a stop key 114R (114L) (not shown) is pressed to stop heating of the right heating port 4R (or the left heating port 4L), the heating operation is stopped, or when certain conditions (continuous cooking time or reaching of a target temperature) are met, the heating operation is stopped at that point.
The stop key 114R is arranged on the right operation section 15R, and the stop key 114L is arranged on the right operation section 15R, and is an input key corresponding to the stop key 114 of the central operation section 15M.

The program included in the recipe data CD specifies heating pause periods P3 and P5, which will be described later, but the duration of these heating pause periods P3 and P5 is not specified. However, in order to prevent cooking from being interrupted for an excessively long time, for example, the elapsed time of each cooking step 1 and cooking step 2 may be counted based on the end point of each step, and if, for example, 30 minutes have elapsed, an alarm may be issued and the execution of the cooking menu may be forcibly stopped.

In the example of recipe data CD in Figure 33, cooking step 1 is performed using the first heating means HM1, cooking step 2 is performed using a microwave heating source (second heating means HM2), and finally cooking step 3 is provided in which the food to be cooked is moved onto the top plate 3 and induction heating is performed as a finishing touch to compensate for insufficient heating.

In addition, this cooking device 1 has additional protection measures in place to prevent the cooking mode settings and control conditions from being inadvertently changed in response to an external command signal.

In the example of FIG. 33, the first heating means HM1 is operated first, and the second heating means HM2 is operated after the first heating operation is completed. However, the radiant heat heating means 12 may be operated as the third heating means at the same time as the second heating means HM2.

As shown in FIG. 33, the collaborative cooking menu shown here is composed of four steps.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 107 is operated to execute the collaborative cooking menu to when the (induction) heating cooking operation is started at the right heating port 4R by the input key 113R (not shown).

When the input key 109 is operated, if the "permission conditions" as described above are satisfied, the control device 40 displays the first specific screen 16M1. Note that the first specific screen 16M1 is not shown in FIG. 33.

When the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, one of the linked cooking menus can be selected by operating the input key 107 or the dial-type selection means 123. After that, by operating the input key 113R, the system transitions to linked cooking mode (using the right heating port 4R) and proceeds to the heating and cooking step P2.

When the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display unit 16M by pressing the input key 107 once, and the identification information 167 of the linked cooking menu desired by the user US is displayed in a specified position on the first specific screen 16M1 (default display), there is no need to press the input key 107 once again. In addition, there is no need to select the linked cooking menu using the dial-type selection means 123.

P2 is a heating and cooking period (cooking step 1) by the first heating means HM1.
In this cooking step 1, when an appropriate food N to be cooked, such as a metal pan, is placed on the right heating port 4R and an input key 113R (not shown) on the right operating section 15R is pressed, the heating and cooking operation is started.

At the stage when the cooking process 1 is started, the control device 40 has already finished judging the permission conditions (1 and 2) and therefore knows which heating part of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating means) is in use. In other words, it knows the use status of both the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L.
Therefore, as a default setting, the control device 40 determines to use the "right heating section" 4R in cooking step 3 of the coordinated cooking mode, and occupies this right heating port 4R.

The cooking step 1 is basically determined in advance by the operation program of the linked cooking menu. For example, when the standard heating time has elapsed, the voice notification unit 50 notifies the user, and the first specific screen 16M1 displays a message such as "x minutes will soon elapse." In other words, the user US is notified that the cooking step 1 is nearing completion.
To end cooking step 1, the user US only needs to press the input key 114R (not shown) of the right operation unit 15R once.

P3 is the heating pause period during which cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1 is temporarily stopped and cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2 is started.

This heating pause period P3 is a period required for checking the degree of heating of the food in cooking step 1, for adding seasonings, or for adding another food to perform cooking step 2. It is also a period required for moving the food to the heating chamber 6.
The heating pause step P3 ends when the start key 113 is pressed, and the process proceeds to the cooking step 2 of P4.

This cooking process 2 is started when the control device 40 confirms that the door 7 has been opened once during the pause period P3 and has been closed thereafter. The door open/close signal from the open/close detection unit 10 is utilized by the control device 40.
The control device 40 measures the time required from when the door 7 is opened until the door 7 is closed again, and if a certain allowable time TX is exceeded, a safety measure is adopted such that the heating operation will not start even if the input key 113 is pressed from that point onwards.

The cooking step 2 basically ends automatically when the heating time predetermined by the operation program of the linked cooking menu has elapsed or when the temperature of the food to be cooked has risen to a set value (e.g., 90°C). For example, in one linked cooking menu, heating begins with a microwave output of 500 W. Furthermore, if the user US opens the door 7 at any time, the microwave irradiation is instantly stopped and the heating operation is stopped.

In cooking step 2 of P4, the user US may be able to individually set the control conditions (e.g., cooking time and target temperature) by operating at least one of the two input keys 108, 109 and the dial-type selection means 123, but depending on the cooking menu, the user US may not be able to change the control conditions.

The example in Figure 33 shows the case where cooking process 2 is ended by pressing the stop key 114 on the central operation unit 15M. When the instruction to stop cooking process 2 is given in this way, cooking process 2 ends and the process proceeds to the heating pause period P5.

The heating pause period P5 is a period required to check the degree of heating of the food in cooking step 2, to add seasonings, or to add another food to be cooked and perform the next cooking step 3. For example, in cooking step 2, only frozen food is heated as the food to be cooked, and in cooking step 3, a food to be cooked that has been immersed in seasonings or cooking liquid, or that has been cooked separately by preheating, etc., can be added to the same heated food N. This broadens the range of cooking possibilities.

During this heating pause period P5, the user US opens the door 7, removes the food to be cooked from inside the heating chamber 6, and places it on the top plate 3. The food to be cooked is placed inside a heated object N such as a metal pot.
Then, when the input key 113R (not shown) for the right heating unit 4 is pressed to command the start of cooking, the heating pause period P5 ends and the process proceeds to a heating cooking period P6 (induction heating "cooking step 3").

P6 switches from cooking step 2 using the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source) to cooking step 3 using the first heating means HM1 (in this case, induction heating means, for example, the right heating port 4R).
In this cooking step 3, when cooking is performed using the right heating port 4R as described above, the user US can individually set control conditions (e.g., cooking time and target temperature) by operating input keys 108R and 109R (neither shown) arranged on the right operation unit 15R. Control conditions can also be selected using the dial-type selection means 123.

If cooking step 3 is performed using the left heating port 4L, the user US can individually set the control conditions (e.g., cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 108L and 109L (neither shown) located on the left operation unit 15L. Control conditions can also be selected using the dial-type selection means 123.

When the stop key 114R (not shown) on the right operation unit 15R is pressed to command the cooking to stop, cooking step 3 ends and the operation of the linked cooking mode KM1 ends. In the case of timer cooking, induction heating cooking ends automatically when the time has elapsed, and cooking step 3 ends.

As is clear from FIG. 33, the right operation unit 15R of the right heating port 4R becomes unusable from the point at which the start of cooking is decided using the start key 113 of the central operation unit 15M, not at the stage at which the linked cooking menu is selected, i.e., the point at which the identification information 167 indicating the name of the cooking on the linked cooking menu is displayed on the central display unit 16M. Note that if the left heating port 4L is set by default, the left heating port 4L will be occupied.

As is clear from the above description, the control device 40 performs the following function restriction process.
(1) The input signal from the right operation unit 15R is disabled or the input is restricted. For example, the input functions of the input keys 107R, 108R, and 109R are disabled. As a result, the right heating port 4R cannot be used (cannot input) during the heating and cooking period (cooking step 1) to the heating and cooking period (cooking step 3) except when input is required in the linked cooking mode KM1.
(2) Even when the heating and cooking period (cooking step 1) begins, the left operation unit 15L can be used (the input signal from the left operation unit 15L is not invalidated).

In this way, when the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) begins, the control device 40 transitions from cooking process 1 to occupying only the right heating port 4R for cooking process 3.

Therefore, the right heating port 4R is "occupied" by the selection of the linked cooking menu. Also, when viewed from the perspective of the first heating means HM1 as a whole, the use of only a portion (the right side) of the three heating parts is "restricted."

Even after the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) ends, the above-mentioned restricted state of the right heating port 4R is not released.
During the preparation period P1, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display unit 16M, and the user US can easily understand that the cooperative cooking mode is being entered. After that, during the cooking process 1, the display of the first specific screen 16M1 on the central display unit 15M disappears, and instead the first specific screen 16R1 (not shown) is displayed on the right display unit 15R.
Therefore, when operating the right operation unit 15R, the user US can easily see on the right display unit 16R that the cooperative cooking mode is in effect. The same is true for cooking step 3.

Furthermore, even if the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has changed from an open state to a closed state before the heating cooking period (cooking process 2) begins, if the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is higher than the reference value, there is a concern that the control device 40, the non-contact (infrared) sensor 13, and thermistor sensor 14 may erroneously recognize the abnormally high temperature in the heating chamber 6 as indicating that cooking is complete even before cooking has begun.
Therefore, before the start of the heating cooking period (cooking process 1), if the temperature in the heating chamber 6 is too high, the first specific screen 16M1 displayed on the central display unit 16M will display the message "The second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) cannot be used immediately due to high temperature."

The periods indicated by the thick arrows in Figure 33 are the restricted period for receiving one recipe data CD and the restricted period for acquiring additional recipe data CD.

In the central operation section 15M, after the input key 107 is touched once to display the first specific screen 16M1, the limiting operation is performed by the limiting section 55 as follows.
It should be noted that the communication unit 51 enables the reception and transmission functions at the point in time when the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (before that, at least the reception function is disabled).

That is, the limiting unit 55 built into the control device 40 operates as follows.
As shown in Fig. 33, it is not possible to change a specific coordinated cooking menu A obtained from outside to another coordinated cooking menu B (e.g. "hamburger steak") in the same coordinated cooking mode KM1. To change it, it is necessary to operate the stop key 114 to cancel the coordinated cooking mode KM1 once and return to the initial standby screen 16MH.

In other words, once the time limit indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 33 is reached, the cooking using the specific linked cooking menu A obtained from outside can be canceled at any time by operating the stop key 114. Once a cancellation operation is performed in this way, the screen returns to the initial standby screen 16MH, and in this state, it is necessary to touch the input key 107 again.

In addition, for a specific linked cooking menu A based on recipe data CD acquired from outside, during the period until all cooking processes are completed, the control device 40 cannot acquire recipe data CD for another linked cooking menu C from outside (such as the communication terminal 200).

In other words, when the limited period indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 33 begins, the start of cooking step 1 of the linked cooking mode KM1 can be decided by operating the start key 113 of the central operation unit 15M, and cooking can be performed using the recipe data CD of the specific linked cooking menu A acquired immediately before this decision. However, until all cooking steps of this cooking menu A are completed, further recipe data CD cannot be acquired from outside.

In addition, if a specific linked cooking menu D based on recipe data CD obtained from outside is one in which cooking step 1 is performed using the right heating port 4L, when the start key 113R (not shown) located on the right operation unit 15R is pressed, the control device 40 cannot obtain recipe data CD for another linked cooking menu from outside (such as the communication terminal 200) until all cooking steps for that specific linked cooking menu D are completed.

Next, reference will be made to FIG. 34 to FIG.
FIG. 34 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable section and control operation of the combined cooking mode KM1 in the cooking appliance 1.

In FIG. 34, SA1 to SA9 indicate the operation of the control device 40.
First, the control device 40 detects that the main power switch 20 is turned on (step SA1), transmits data indicating that the device has been started (a type of operating status data OS) from the communication unit 51 to the outside, and starts a self-diagnosis mode (SA2). That is, the control device 40 checks whether the components of the cooking appliance 1, such as the circuits and sensors, are normal.

Next, the display units 16 are started, and the initial standby screen is displayed on each of the three display units 16: the central display unit 16M, the right display unit 16R, and the left display unit 16L.

The cooking mode can be selected using any of the three operating units: the central operating unit 15M, the right operating unit 15R, and the left operating unit 15L. However, since the central operating unit 15M can select the linked cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2, the explanation in Figures 34 to 36 is limited to the case where cooking is started using the central operating unit 15M.

The standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display unit 16M. After this, the standby initial screen 16MH displays a message prompting the user US to select a heating method, and the audio notification unit 50 provides similar audio guidance (SA3A).

Next, the user US presses the input key 107 on the central operation unit 15M to select the collaborative cooking mode KM1. This is step SA4 in FIG. 34.

The "initial standby period" TP in this embodiment 1 is the period that begins from step SA3A, and the timing at which this initial standby period TP ends is the point in time when the input key for starting the heating operation is pressed (SA7). In the coordinated cooking mode KM1, the input key for starting is input key 113. SA9 indicates the point in time when the heating operation or oscillation operation of the heating coils 9L, 9C, and 9R and the microwave oscillation source 11 actually begins.

The initial waiting period TP cannot exceed the first limit period (first time limit TX). In other words, the initial waiting period TP is limited to, for example, a maximum of 30 minutes by the processing of step SM5 described in FIG. 20.

Next, during the initial waiting period TP while waiting for a command to start the heating operation as described above, if the input key 107, which also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1, is "pressed and held," the voice input mode is started.
If the user does not consent to the acquisition of recipe acquisition data CD from outside during the initial standby period TP, the recipe data CD for the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, etc. cannot be acquired.

However, in the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 1, when the input key 107 is "long-pressed" at step SA4, the "recipe acquisition permission condition" described below is satisfied. In other words, the program permits the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD.

Note that even if the input key 107 is "short-pressed" at step SA4, the "recipe acquisition permission condition" described below is satisfied.

In addition, in the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 1, when the input key 108 is "long-pressed" or "short-pressed" at the step SA4 stage, the "recipe acquisition permission condition" described below is satisfied. In other words, the program permits the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD (for the composite cooking mode KM2).

Incidentally, the input key 107 also serves as a selection section for the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the input key 107 is "pressed and held" in step SA4 and the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds), the mode automatically switches to voice input mode 1 at the time the touch time is exceeded (step SA5).

Therefore, the mode is switched to voice input mode 1 from step SA5 shown in FIG. 34, and during the voice input mode 1 period, the control conditions for the coordinated cooking mode KM1 can be set by voice input.
The voice input mode 1 is automatically terminated when a command to start the heating operation is given through the input key 113 .

During the initial standby period TP, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 is a period TB1 during which the recipe data CD of the combined cooking mode KM2 can be acquired, and the period from steps SA4 to SA7 is a period TB1 during which the recipe data CD of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be cancelled.
Furthermore, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 is a period TB3 during which the control conditions (control data) of the recipe data CD of the collaborative cooking mode KM1 can be changed.

Next, a description will be given of Fig. 35. Fig. 35 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the input operation section (central operation section 15M) and the central display section 16M in chronological order.
In FIG. 35, the user US operates the input key 154M to select the combined cooking mode KM2 (step SA4).
Then, during the initial waiting period TP, at the time of step SA4 when the input key 108 is pressed, the "recipe acquisition condition" is satisfied.

If the "recipe acquisition condition" is satisfied during the initial standby period TP, the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire the recipe data CD for the control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 (e.g., "warming") once via the communication unit 51.

Furthermore, during the initial standby period TP, the recipe data CD of the cooking menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 acquired from outside can be cancelled by pressing the stop key 114.
In practice, in the initial standby period TP, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed first, and after the identification information 160 of the recipe data CD is displayed on that screen, the display can be cancelled by pressing the stop key 114.

Furthermore, during the initial waiting period TP, the control conditions of the acquired recipe data CD can be changed as appropriate by operating the input keys 108, 109 or the dial-type selection means 123 (some control conditions cannot be changed). Again, the control conditions are displayed on the displayed second specific screen 16M1, so the displayed contents can be checked before being changed.

Incidentally, the input key 108 also serves as a selection section for the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the input key 108 is "pressed and held" in step SA4 and the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds), the mode automatically switches to voice input mode 1 at the point in time when the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds) (step SA5).

Therefore, the mode is switched to voice input mode 1 from step SA5 shown in FIG. 35, and during the period of voice input mode 1, the control conditions for the combined cooking mode KM2 can be set by voice input.
The voice input mode 1 is automatically terminated when a command to start the heating operation is given through the input key 113 .

35, the initial standby period TP ends when the input key 113 is operated (SA7), and the actual heating operation starts immediately thereafter (SA9).
As described above, the initial standby period TP ends at step SA9 when the start key 113 is pressed. After this, the recipe data CD for another composite cooking mode KM2 cannot be obtained from outside (however, if the composite cooking mode KM2 is cancelled with the stop key 114 during the cooking process, the recipe data CD can be obtained again).

The time difference between the acquisition of recipe data CD by step SA3 and step SA4 in FIG. 35 is limited to 30 minutes. If 30 minutes is exceeded, the control device 40 forcibly turns off the main power switch 20 for safety reasons, since there is a possibility that the user US has forgotten to input the operation. Alternatively, it issues a command to perform an operation such as issuing an alarm via the audio notification unit 51 (see step SL8 in FIG. 24).

In addition, instead of restricting the time difference between the acquisition of recipe data CD by step SA3 and step SA4 to within 30 minutes, the period from step SA3A to step SA4, which is the point at which the initial waiting period TP begins, may be restricted to within 30 minutes.

As is clear from FIG. 35, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 during the initial waiting period TP is the period TB1 during which recipe data CD for the composite cooking mode KM2 can be acquired.

Within the initial standby period TP, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 is a cancelable period TB2 for the recipe data CD in the composite cooking mode.
The period from steps SA4 to SA7 is a period TB3 during which the control conditions (control data) of the recipe data CD of the composite cooking mode KM2 can be changed.

Next, we will refer to FIG.
Fig. 36 is a time chart showing a first modified example of the time chart shown in Fig. 34. SA1 to SA9, like Fig. 34, show the operation of the heating control unit 43 of the control device 40 when cooking in the combined cooking mode KM1 is performed.
Step SA4 is the time when the user US selects the cooperative cooking mode KM1 by touching the input key 107. In the case of Fig. 36, the initial standby period TP also starts from step SA3A and ends when the start key 113 is pressed.

Even in the case of the collaborative cooking mode KM1 shown in FIG. 36, the input key 107 is pressed during the initial standby period TP, which is limited to a predetermined time (e.g., within 30 minutes), so the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is met at the time of step SA4.

When the “recipe acquisition permission condition” is satisfied, the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire the recipe data CD of the collaborative cooking mode KM1 via the communication unit 51 only once.
In FIG. 36, the timing of obtaining the recipe data CD is different from that in the example shown in FIG. 34, as will be described below.

If the input key 107, which also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1, is not pressed during the initial standby period TP, the cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM1 cannot be selected. In other words, the recipe data CD to be acquired cannot be identified.

When the input key 107 is operated, the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is satisfied. In other words, the data acquisition unit 53 is programmed to permit acquisition of the recipe data CD. From the point of step SA4, the recipe data CD can be acquired (note that in reality, since the recipe data CD is subject to restrictions such as the performance of the communication infrastructure, acquisition may not be completed instantly, and may take several to 20 seconds).

Incidentally, the input key 107 also serves as a selection section for the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the input key 107 is "pressed and held" in step SA4 and the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds), the mode automatically switches to voice input mode 1 at the time the touch time is exceeded (step SA5).

However, there are cases where the user US does not realize that the mode has been switched to the voice input mode 1 at the above-mentioned stage. Alternatively, there are cases where the user US is not aware of the long press operation.
36, after the automatic switching, when the first specific screen 16M1 indicates that the recipe data CD has been acquired, the screen also indicates that the mode has been switched to voice input mode 1. At the same time, the voice notification unit 50 also notifies the user. An actual example of the first specific screen 16M1 is shown in FIG. 37.

36, input in voice input mode 1 is accepted. Therefore, from step SA5 onwards, the control conditions for the coordinated cooking mode KM1 can be set by voice input.
The voice input mode 1 is automatically terminated when a command to start the heating operation is given through the input key 113 .

Next, we will refer to FIG.
FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit 15 and the central display unit 16M in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 corresponding to the modified example of FIG.
There are two types of auxiliary information 179 shown in Fig. 37. One is voice input mode display information 179D which indicates that voice input is being accepted because the mode is voice input mode. The other is reference information 179E which recommends input of control conditions and includes examples (standard values) of control conditions which can be input.

As explained in FIG. 31, 173 is an external recipe identification unit. This makes it easy to see that the linked cooking menu currently displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 has been obtained from an external source.

Next, we will explain Figure 38.
FIG. 38 is a time chart for explaining the period during which recipe data CD can be acquired and the control operations in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 as a whole, and shows a second modified example of the time chart shown in FIG.

In FIG. 38, SA1 to SA9 indicate the operation of the control device 40, similarly to FIG.
38, the hardware configuration of the voice input dedicated key 180 is changed. Specifically, the operation surface of the input key 180 is configured to be illuminated from below by a light emitting element (LED) (not shown) arranged below the operation surface.

The input function of the input key 180 is enabled when the control device 40 is started and the input key 107, 108, or 109 is touched (step SA4). After the input function is enabled, the input key 180 is illuminated by the light-emitting element (not shown) and becomes prominent in the operation unit 15.

The initial standby period TP also begins when the standby initial screen 16MH prompts the user US to select a cooking mode (step SA3A).

As in FIG. 34, step SA4 is the point in time when any one of input keys 107, 108, or 109 is touched. At this point in time, the "recipe acquisition permission conditions" are met, so that acquisition of recipe data CD can be executed. Thereafter, when input key 113 is operated, the initial waiting period TP ends.

In the example of FIG. 38, after the input key 107 is touched, recipe data for the coordinated cooking mode KM1 can be obtained from the outside via the communication unit 51. When the input key 108 is touched without touching the input key 107, recipe data for the combined cooking mode KM2 can be obtained.

If the input key 180 is touch-operated at the time of step SA5 after the input key 107 or 108 is operated, the control device 40 transitions to the voice input mode 2. Therefore, after step SA5, the user US can input the control conditions by voice.
In the example of Fig. 38, since the voice input mode 2A is selected, the input functions of (some of) the input keys (e.g., 107) other than the voice input dedicated key 180 are temporarily disabled after the voice input key is started. Therefore, even if the input keys 107 and 108 are touched, no input can be made. The input function of the start key 113 is not disabled.

Next, we will explain Figure 39.
39 shows the main processing of the control device 40 up to the start of cooking based on recipe data CD obtained from the outside. In particular, it shows the processing for displaying data on food ingredients and nutritional ingredients.

In FIG. 39, the recipe data CD acquired from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51 is stored in the recipe data storage unit 42 of the storage device 41 (step SS30). Then, it is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS31).

At step SS31, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display unit 16M. In other words, at least the identification information 167 is displayed.

In the next step SS32, in order to display the food ingredients, it is determined whether a display command has been issued from the user US. Since the system has already switched to voice input mode 1, if a specified term (phrase) such as "food ingredients" or "calories" is spoken, the result of this step SS32 is "Yes." This voice signal is analyzed by the voice signal analysis unit 58 (see FIG. 8), and the data on the food ingredients of the target cooking menu is read from the storage device 41.

The first specific screen 16M1 displays a food component display screen 16M1A as shown in Fig. 32(A) (step SS33). The amounts of energy, protein, fat and carbohydrate are displayed.
Next, the process proceeds to step SS34, which is a determination step of whether the start key 113 has been pressed. In this step SS34, the process waits for a certain period of time until an operation by the user US is performed. If the start key 113 is pressed during this waiting period, the display returns to the first specific screen 16M1. Then, the driving of the heating means (such as the first heating means HM1) is started (SS35).

If the input key 109 is not pressed and no voice command is given to display food ingredients within a certain period of time from step SS31, the determination in step SS32 will be "No."

If the determination in step SS32 is "No", the process proceeds to step SS36. In step SS36, a determination is made as to whether or not a command to display the nutritional content of the food has been issued. Since the process has already shifted to voice input mode 1, in step SS36, a specified term (phrase) such as "nutrients" or "nutrition" is spoken.

Then, the audio signal is analyzed by the audio signal analysis unit 58 (see FIG. 8) and the nutritional component data of the target cooking menu is read from the storage device 41. Then, step SS36 is judged as "Yes." Note that even if the input key 180 is pressed again to cancel the audio input mode 2 and then the input key 156M is pressed, step SS36 is also judged as "Yes."

If step SS36 is judged as "Yes", the display unit 16 displays a nutritional component display screen 16M1B as shown in FIG. 32(B) (step SS37). The amounts of energy, protein, fat and iron are then displayed. Then, the process proceeds to step SS34.

As mentioned above, if the function setting input key 115 has not been operated in advance to set the food ingredients and nutritional components to be displayed individually each time before cooking begins, the operations of steps SS33 and SS37 shown in FIG. 39 will not be performed.

Note that, although the examples in Figures 34 to 38 do not show the single cooking mode KM3, it can be acquired from outside via the communication unit 51 during the initial standby period TP, similar to the recipe data CD for the combined cooking mode KM2 and the coordinated cooking mode KM1.

Next, we will explain Figure 40.
Fig. 40 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of the control device 40 when the cooking appliance 1 is switched to the voice input mode. Note that Fig. 40 shows the case of the coordinated cooking mode KM3, but the same is basically true for the other cooking modes.

In FIG. 40, step SS20 indicates the time when the input mode of the control device 40 is switched to voice input mode 1.
In the next step SS21, the voice notification unit 50 and the central display unit 16M notify that the voice input has started to be accepted. The state of the central display unit 16M at this point is, for example, as shown in Fig. 27. That is, as the auxiliary information 179, voice input mode display information 179A indicating that voice input is being accepted is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1.

In the next step SS22, the voice signal analysis unit 58 transitions to an input standby state in which it receives voice commands from the user US. In addition, a time measurement unit (not shown) inside the control device 40 starts measuring the elapsed time.

The voice input information uttered by the user US is acquired by the voice signal receiving unit 56 via a microphone (not shown). The voice signal receiving unit 56 converts the acquired voice information into a predetermined voice signal and transmits it to the voice signal analyzing unit 58 (step SS23).

The audio signal analysis unit 56 analyzes the received audio signal (step SS24) and displays the input content on the central display unit 16M (first specific screen 16M1). For example, it notifies the user by voice such as "Hamburg steak, right IH, accepted" and also displays the same in text on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS25).

In step SS25, if the input information is insufficient, the voice notification unit 50 may further guide the user by voice, such as "Please specify the preheat temperature." Alternatively, the range of specific control conditions may be notified, such as "We recommend a preheat temperature of 200°C. Please specify the temperature."

If the input of the control conditions required to start the heating operation is insufficient, the process returns to step SS23. Before returning to step SS23, the audio notification unit 50 indicates the control conditions that are insufficient to be input and prompts the user to input them (not shown).

When the heating control unit 43 determines that input of the control conditions required to start the heating operation has been completed (step SS26), the process proceeds to step SS27. In step SS27, since voice input has been completed, a notice is given that voice input mode 1 will be released, and it is recommended that the start key 113 be touched (step SS27). Note that when the touch key 113 is touched, voice input mode 1 is released.

On the other hand, if no voice command is received in step SS23, the process proceeds to step SS28. In step SS28, it is determined whether the time elapsed since step SS22 exceeds a predetermined time limit TZ. If the time limit TZ has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SS23. However, if the time limit TZ (e.g., 5 minutes) has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SS29. Step SS29 is "automatic shutoff process 2" similar to step SM6 in FIG. 20. Note that this "automatic shutoff process 2" is a series of processes in which, in the state of the first specific screen 16M1, the voice notification unit 50 issues an alarm to the user US, and then the screen automatically switches to the standby initial screen 16MH, and then the main power switch 20 is automatically opened. This prevents the input process from being left unattended for a long time for some reason, ensuring safety.

Next, we will explain Figure 41.
FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a control menu displayed on the central display unit 16M when the central operation unit 15M is operated for the combination cooking mode KM2.
First, when the user US turns on the main power by pressing the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 (see FIG. 8), the input functions of the left operation unit 15L, the central operation unit 15M, and the right operation unit 15R are enabled. In other words, the control device 40 is in a state where it can accept operation signals from each of these operation units 15L, 15M, and 15R, and the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display unit 16M.

In this state, when the user US presses the input key 108, the display screen 16ST (with default settings) is displayed as shown in FIG.
FIG. 41 shows the change in the second specific screen 16M2.
As is clear from the display screen 16ST, the name (identification information) 160 of the control menu "Warm" is displayed large in the center of the first area 22 in the front-to-rear direction.

The word "IH heating" (control menu identification information) 161 is displayed behind the control menu identification information 160 "Warm" displayed in the center of the first area 22, and conversely, the word "Microwave manual" (control menu identification information) 162 is displayed slightly smaller in front of it.

As a result, when the user US selects the control menu, it is clear that the next options are "IH heating" and "Microwave manual". If, at this stage, the input key 107 is pressed once more and the dial-type selection means 123 is rotated (for example, clockwise), the control menu identification information 162 for "Microwave manual" is displayed large, as if it has moved (backwards) to the position of the characters "Warm" (control menu identification information) 160. Note that the characters of the control menu identification information 162 have not actually moved; the displayed information has simply switched.

The characters "IH heating" (control menu identification information) 161 are displayed larger, as if they have moved (forward) to the position of the characters "Warm" (control menu identification information) 160. Note that in this case, too, the control menu identification information 162 has not actually moved; the display information has simply switched.

As shown in FIG. 41, the display screen 16ST displays a target temperature of "80°C" in the second area 23. When microwave heating is performed at this target temperature, microwave heating is automatically stopped when the infrared sensor 13 detects that the temperature of the food being cooked is 80°C.

If you wish to change the temperature displayed in this second area 23 and change the automatic stop temperature, simply press the input key 108 corresponding to the second area 23 once and rotate the dial selection means 123. For example, when the dial selection means 123 is rotated clockwise, the temperature increases by 5°C to 85°C, as shown in display screen 16UP1. Conversely, when it is rotated counterclockwise, the temperature decreases by 5°C to 75°C, as shown in display screen 16DN1.

The second area 23 also displays a heating source display section 163 that indicates in text that the heating source is a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2).

As described above, 164 is reference information that is automatically displayed to indicate that this is a recommended control menu for heating side dishes, etc. The content of this reference information may be other additional information 165, and two or more types of information may be displayed alternately or sequentially for several seconds each on the display screen (e.g., third area 24) of the central display unit 16M.

Furthermore, as shown in category 2 of FIG. 11, information (reference information) 164 indicating the main points of each control menu may be displayed whenever necessary in response to the rotation operation of dial type selection means 123 .
In other words, in this embodiment 1, the reference information 164 that corresponds one-to-one with each control menu (e.g., "warm up") is displayed so that the user US does not hesitate as to whether or not to select each control menu (e.g., "warm up").

Furthermore, when reference information 164 is displayed in the third area 24 as shown in FIG. 41, the reference information 164 displayed in the third area can be changed by touching the input key 109 located in front of the reference information 164 once and rotating the dial-type selection means 123. In other words, by rotating the dial-type selection means 123, the more detailed additional information 166 may be displayed in the third area 24 instead of the reference information 164. Note that multiple pieces of additional information 166 may be prepared, rather than just one.

As shown in FIG. 41, the aforementioned "composite cooking mode" KM2 is characterized by a mode in which multiple heating means with different heating principles, such as the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, are driven simultaneously or automatically switched with a time lag to heat and cook a common food item.

Next, we will explain Figure 42.
FIG. 42 is a time chart for explaining a countermeasure to prevent interference in the voice input mode when heating and cooking is performed simultaneously in the central operation unit 15M and the left operation unit 15L.
42, the number "107" indicates the input key 107, and "113" indicates the start key 113. "123" indicates the dial type selection means 123.

As shown in FIG. 42, when the input key 107 is "short pressed" on the central operation unit 15M, the input key 107 is followed by pressing the dial type selection means 123 and then pressing the start key 1113, and the heating and cooking operation (cooking process) is started.
On the other hand, if the initial touch operation of the input key 107 is a "long press", the mode is switched to the voice input mode, and the heating cooking operation (cooking process) is started by pressing the start key 113.

When the input process for one cooking session is completed and cooking is started, the voice input mode is automatically released (the voice input mode ends and the mode automatically returns to the touch input mode, which is the default setting).
Therefore, during the cooking process, it is not possible to stop or restart cooking by voice input, or to control conditions such as heat level by voice input.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the control device 40 is configured not to simultaneously accept a command to start the voice input mode for the central operation unit (15M) and a command to start the voice input mode for the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L. This is shown diagrammatically in FIG. 42.

As shown in FIG. 42, when the input key 107 of the central operation unit 15M is "pressed and held" to start the voice input mode, if the left operation unit 15L is not in the "occupied" state described above, the input function of the input keys 108L to 109R (none of which are shown in the figure) of the left operation unit 15L is valid.
However, even in this case, the voice input mode cannot be set even if the input key 107L (not shown) of the left operation section 15L is pressed and held.

As shown in FIG. 42, the "prohibited period ET" of voice input begins when the input key 107 of the central operation unit 15M is "pressed and held" to start the voice input mode, and during this prohibited period, command signals from the left operation unit 15L are refused. Therefore, no input can be made by either a "long press" or a "short press." Such "refusal to accept" may be notified on the left display unit 16L.

Therefore, when the central operation unit 15M is in voice input mode, the left operation unit 15L cannot be set to voice input mode, and therefore the voice signal issued by the user US (for the central operation unit 15M) is not received by the voice signal receiving unit 56L (not shown) of the left operation unit 15L if it is an input command for the left operation unit 15L.

As shown in FIG. 42, after the "voice input mode" of the central operation unit 15M is ended by operating the start key 113, the voice input mode can be started in the left operation unit 15L by "pressing and holding" the input key 107L (not shown). At that point, the central operation unit 15M has already returned to the touch input mode, so even if voice input is made to the left operation unit 15L, it will not be an erroneous command to the central operation unit 15M.

In FIG. 42, measures to prevent interference in the voice input mode between the central operation unit 15M and the left operation unit 15L are described, but similar measures are also implemented between the central operation unit 15M and the right operation unit 15R. Measures to prevent interference in the voice input mode are also implemented between the left operation unit 15L and the right operation unit 15R. For example, this is the case when cooking is performed simultaneously in the single cooking mode KM3 in the left operation unit 15L and the right operation unit 15R.

Summary of embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device according to the first disclosure is as follows:
A main body 2 and
A heating chamber 6 formed inside the main body 2;
A first heating means HM1 for heating an object N placed on an upper surface of the main body 2;
A second heating means HM2 for cooking in the heating chamber 6;
an input operation unit 15 for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
A notification means 90;
a control device 40 that receives commands from the input operation unit 15;
The input operation unit 15 includes first selection means (input keys) 107, 108, 109 for selecting one of a plurality of cooking modes (linked, combined, independent) KM1 to KM3 using the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, and second selection means (dial-type selection means) 123 for selecting one cooking menu or control menu from the cooking modes selected by the first selection means,
The first selection means 107, 108, 109 are touch-type input keys (provided for each of the cooking modes),
The second selection means 123 is a dial-type selection means,
The first selection means 107, 108, 109 issues a voice input mode setting signal MC1 when the length of the operation time is equal to or longer than a threshold value.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

Because of this configuration, the touch-type input keys 107, 108, and 109 on the input operation unit can be used to switch to voice input mode, so that the tedious input process before starting the heating operation can be input by voice. This improves operability for the user US and reduces the workload.

Furthermore, by rotating the dial-type selection means 123, cooking menu and control menu options can be easily displayed on the display unit 16 for selection, improving the operability of preparation work before starting cooking.

Incidentally, in comparison with the past, for example, when the action of selecting the heating source or control menu to be used in cooking is performed using the touch input keys, and then the setting of the heat level, etc. is performed using the touch input keys or push button input keys (sometimes called "plus keys" or "minus keys"). After first pressing the touch keys one or more times to select the heating source, etc., several touch operations are required to select one of ten menus that determine the cooking contents, for example. Furthermore, if there are ten levels of heat level, etc., several touch operations are required to select one of them. Therefore, several to about ten touch operations are required before cooking begins.
In comparison, in embodiment 1, for example, after pressing the input key once to select the coordinated cooking mode KM1, the input key 107 is pressed once to select the first area 22 for selecting a coordinated cooking menu, the dial-type selection means 123 is rotated, and when selecting the second area 23 to set the heat level or the like, the input key 107 is touched once, and the dial-type selection means 123 is again rotated, so that only three touches of the key are required, and even including the dial-type selection means 123, it is often only about five touches.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure,
The input operation unit 15 generates the voice input mode corresponding signal MC1,
The control device 40 is configured such that, when it receives the voice input mode corresponding signal MC1, it is capable of acquiring the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, and also accepts a command to set control conditions from the user US.

This configuration allows the input operation unit 15 to control the timing of obtaining various recipe data CD from outside, preventing situations where the operation of receiving recipe data CD starts unintentionally before cooking begins.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure,
The control device 40 has an integrated cooking mode KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven with a time lag to perform one cooking operation,
When the control device 40 receives a command 1 to select a cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 from the input operation unit 15, if the permission conditions (see FIG. 17) are satisfied, the control device 40 displays a first specific screen 16M1 for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM1 on the display unit 16,
The control device 40 is configured such that, when command 2 is received from the input operation unit 15 (input keys 109 or audio signal receiving unit 56) while the first specific screen 16M1 is being displayed (see Figure 31), information on at least one of the amounts of food ingredients or nutritional ingredients for a specific dish (see Figure 32) that can be executed in the collaborative cooking mode KM1 is displayed on the display unit 16.

Because of this configuration, when selecting a specific cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the user can easily obtain information on the ingredients and nutrients of the food related to that cooking menu. This improves the convenience of the cooking menu selection operation by the user US.

For example, the user US can select an appropriate cooking menu based on information on the amount of food ingredients and nutrients depending on the family's health management, dietary restrictions, etc., which can contribute to improving their eating habits.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure,
The display is switched between a dedicated food ingredient display screen 16M1A showing the identification information 167 of one cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") and the food ingredients, and a dedicated nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B showing the identification information 167 and the nutritional ingredients, so that the user US can easily and clearly identify each piece of information.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is realized in the following form.
That is, one embodiment of the heating cooker 1 disclosed in the first embodiment is as follows:
A first heating means HM1 for heating an object to be heated;
A second heating means HM2 for heating the food in the heating chamber 6;
An input operation unit 15;
A notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
A communication unit 51 that receives recipe data CD for executing cooking from an external device;
A control device 40,
The control device 40 has an integrated cooking menu KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven with a time lag to perform one cooking operation,
The input operation unit includes a voice signal receiving unit 56 serving as a voice input unit, various input keys 107 to 109 (107L to 109L, 107R to 109R) serving as a touch input unit, and a dial-type selection unit 123 for selecting a control condition.
The control device 40 has a heating control unit 43 that controls a heating operation corresponding to the cooperative cooking mode KM1, and a data acquisition unit 53 that acquires the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 for a specific food to be cooked.
The control device 40 enables the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD during an initial standby period TP,
When the control device 40 receives a command 1 to select the cooperative cooking menu KM1 from either the voice input means or the touch input means, if the permission conditions are satisfied, the control device 40 displays a specific cooking menu (e.g., “hamburger steak”) of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 on the display unit 16 as a first specific screen 16M1,
When the control device 40 receives a command 2 from either the voice input means or the touch input means while the first specific screen 16M1 is being displayed, it displays at least one of information on food ingredients or nutrients related to the cooking menu (food ingredient display screen 16M1A or nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B),
The control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD when the voice input means and the touch input means are operated within a first limit period TX,
The input operation unit 15 determines whether or not it is necessary to switch to a voice input mode (voice input mode 1) based on the touch state of the input keys, and issues a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1.
when the control device 40 receives the voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 from the input operation unit 15 during a display period of the first specific screen 16M1, the control device 40 enables acquisition of the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, and also receives a control condition setting command by voice of the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

Because of this configuration, when selecting a specific cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, information on the ingredients and nutrients of each food item can be easily obtained. This improves the convenience of the cooking menu selection operation by the user US. For example, the user US can select an appropriate cooking menu from information on food ingredients and nutritional components depending on the situation, such as family health management and dietary restrictions, which can contribute to improving eating habits.

Furthermore, by rotating the dial-type selection means 123, candidate control conditions can be easily displayed on the display unit 16, improving the operability of setting cooking conditions.

Furthermore, since the recipe data CD relating to the collaborative cooking mode KM1 is received through a special operation by the user US, the timing of data acquisition from outside is controlled.
In other words, when the voice input means and the touch input means satisfy the condition of being operated within the first limit period TX (see FIG. 24 in particular), the recipe data CD can be acquired, so that the recipe data CD is not inadvertently received due to the communication terminal 200 approaching, etc. This can improve the sense of security of the user US.

Furthermore, in the cooking appliance 1 according to the first disclosure, the specific input keys (input keys 107 to 109) of the input operation unit 15 are also used as a selection unit for the voice input mode 1.
With this configuration, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of operation keys (operation units) of the input operation unit 15, and the user US can easily switch to voice input mode 1, thereby preventing a decrease in operability.

Furthermore, in the cooking appliance 1 according to the first disclosure, the specific input keys (input keys 107 to 109) which are the selection section for the voice input mode 1 are also used for acquiring the recipe data CD.
With this configuration, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of operation keys (operation units) of the input operation unit 15, and to prevent a decrease in operability for the user US.

In addition, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the first specific screen 16M1 is not displayed unless the prerequisites for starting the coordinated cooking mode KM1 (permission conditions 1 and 2) are met. Therefore, after the user US sets (selects) various conditions for the coordinated cooking mode KM1 (e.g., heat level, target temperature, heating time, etc.), it is not determined that permission condition 1 or permission condition 2 is not met, and the steps are not forcibly returned to the first standby initial screen 16MH. Therefore, the user US is not forced to perform unnecessary input operations.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the input operation unit 15 is provided with a selection key 180 for selecting a voice input mode 2 using the voice input means.
Therefore, even if the user US has his/her hands full during cooking and cannot perform touch operations, he/she can conveniently give instructions by voice.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the acquisition condition for acquiring recipe data CD from outside is met when the input key 180 and one input key of the touch input unit (e.g., input key 107) are operated within the first time limit (TX).

In other words, the initial waiting period TP cannot exceed the first limit period (first time limit TX). For example, it is a maximum of 30 minutes.

Therefore, even if the user US stops operating the input operation unit 15 midway for some reason, the cooking appliance 1 automatically disables input (by forcibly opening the main power switch 20). This prevents cooking control data and the like from being acquired from an external source without the user US's knowledge, improving safety.

The input operation unit 15 is provided with an input key 180 as a selection unit for voice input mode 2, and an input key (e.g., input key 107) for commanding the display of information on the food component data DD, providing good operability for the user US.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11 of the first embodiment, in a configuration in which the input keys 180 and an input key for commanding the display of information on food component data DD (see input key 109 in FIG. 31) are located on the central operation unit 15M, the central display unit 16M is also located nearby, so that when the user US is standing in front of (near) the central operation unit 15M while cooking, the necessary display and operation units are within the range of operation and visibility of the user US, and the user US can perform operations without moving from his/her standing position. This is expected to have benefits such as reducing the physical burden on the user US while cooking.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, when the input key 180 is not operated and when one of the input keys (107-109) of the input operation unit 15 is not operated within a first time limit (TX), the control device 40 is configured to perform at least one of the following operations: cutting off the supply of main power or instructing the alarm unit 90 to issue an alarm (see automatic cutoff process 1 in FIG. 24).

That is, as explained in FIG. 25, the time that has elapsed since the input key 180 is used to switch to the voice input mode, or since the input key 107, which can switch to the voice input mode 1, is "long pressed" is limited to, for example, 30 minutes. Or, the time that has elapsed since the first step SS5 in which the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed is limited to 30 minutes (see FIG. 25 and FIG. 26).

Therefore, if the user US forgets or is unable to perform an input operation for some reason, the control device 40 will forcibly open the main power switch 20 or issue an alarm from a safety standpoint, thereby improving safety.

Further, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the input operation unit 15 has a function setting key 115,
When the function setting key 115 is operated, the control device 40 transitions to a function setting mode,
The function setting mode is configured to enable setting of whether or not the food ingredients or nutritional ingredients are to be displayed in the central display section 16M, and the conditions under which they are to be displayed.

This configuration allows functions to be set according to the user US's wishes, level of proficiency, etc.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 1,
The heating cooker 1 is characterized in that the restriction unit 55 restricts the acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of the cooking menu to which the acquired recipe data CD is applied is completed.

This configuration allows the two heating means to be selected to perform the individual cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the linked cooking mode KM1 in sequence without interfering with each other. This makes it possible to provide a heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, because of the restriction unit 55, once recipe data for one specific linked cooking menu A is acquired, the control device 40 will not inadvertently acquire recipe data CD for another linked cooking menu B immediately before the start of a cooking process or during a cooking process. Therefore, for example, another cooking menu (including a control menu for a combined cooking mode or a control menu for a single cooking mode) will not be inadvertently received during linked cooking. Therefore, there is no concern about confusion of the user US due to reception or operational interference on the cooking appliance 1 side.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The input operation unit 15 is disclosed to have a configuration in which input keys 109 (107L, 107R) for selecting the single cooking mode KM3, input keys 108 (108L, 108R) for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2, and input keys 107 (107L, 107R) for selecting the linked cooking mode KM1 are each provided separately (see Figures 13 to 16).

With this configuration, the three cooking modes can be selected individually using the respective input keys (input means), improving the operability for the user US even in a cooking device 1 with an increased number of heating sources.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The restriction unit 55 restricts acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until a cooking process of a cooking menu to which the acquired recipe data CD is applied is completed,
After the recipe data is acquired, if the collaborative cooking mode KM1 is canceled by the input operation unit 15 before the cooking process is started, the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire the recipe data CD again.

This prevents the inadvertent reception of another cooking menu (including the control menu for the combined cooking mode or the control menu for the single cooking mode) during coordinated cooking, and allows the cooking menu of the received recipe data CD to be executed stably.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent problems with the operation of the control device 40 and to prevent misunderstandings or confusion on the part of the user US, which may occur due to the inadvertent receipt of recipe data CD for a different cooking menu during the cooking process.

Furthermore, when the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is cancelled, the recipe data CD previously acquired and not used for cooking can be cancelled, and further desired recipe data CD can be acquired, thereby preventing the user US from becoming confused about the recipe data CD.

Further, one embodiment of the heating cooker 1 disclosed in the first embodiment is as follows:
A first heating means HM1 for heating an object N placed on the top plate 3;
an input operation unit 15 for receiving commands from a user US;
A communication unit 51 for receiving recipe data CD from an external device;
a display unit 16 for displaying cooking information and a notification unit 90 having a voice notification unit 50;
A control device 40,
The control device 40 has a function of performing a cooperative cooking mode KM1, a composite cooking mode KM2, and a single cooking mode KM3.
After the main power is turned on by the input operation unit 15, the control device 40
(1) Displaying the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH on the display unit 16,
(2) When the touch-type input keys 107, 108 for selecting either the linked cooking mode KM1 or the composite cooking mode KM2 are operated, the restriction unit 55 restricts the acquisition and use of the recipe data CD acquired from the communication unit 51,
(3) When the input keys 107 and 108 are operated, the display of the initial screen (common screen) 16MH is automatically changed to the display of the first specific screen 16M1 (16R1, 16L1) or the second specific screen 16M2 (16L2, 16R2),
(4) While the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed, the process moves to an initial standby period TP in which a cooking start command is received from the input operation unit 15,
(5) During the initial standby period TP, the acquisition of recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 is limited to one time.
(6) When a specific input key among the input keys 107 and 108 is touched, a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 is generated from the input operation unit 15 in response to the touch state, and the mode transitions to a “voice input mode of control conditions” for executing the recipe data CD.

According to this configuration, once the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH is displayed, it can be easily understood that by subsequently operating the selection input keys 107, 108, the first specific screen 16M1 (16L1, 16R1) and the second specific screen 16M2 (16L2, 16R2) dedicated to the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can be displayed, and recipe data CD can be obtained from outside.
You can also use some of the input keys to switch to voice input mode.
This makes it possible to avoid confusion or misunderstanding in the input operations by the user US from immediately after the main power is turned on until cooking begins, and it is expected that usability will be improved by utilizing voice input and touch input.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment, as described in particular with reference to FIG.
When the input process for one cooking cycle is completed and cooking is started, the voice input mode is automatically released and the default touch input mode is restored, so that when starting input for the next cooking cycle, there is no need to touch input keys or the like just to release the voice input mode, making the operation easy to use.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the control device 40 is configured not to simultaneously accept a command to start the voice input mode for the central operation unit (15M) and a command to start the voice input mode for the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L. In other words, among the three input keys 107 of the central operation unit 15M, the input key 107R (not shown) of the right operation unit 15R, and the input key 107L (not shown) of the left operation unit 15L, the signal of the input key that is touched first (a "long press" operation) is accepted by the control device 40. Touch operations ("long press" operations) on the other two operation units are not recognized as normal signals by the control device 40.

Due to this configuration, in a cooking device 1 equipped with multiple input operation units (central operation unit 15M and left and right operation units 15L, 15R), when one input operation unit is operated to set the voice input mode, even if another input operation unit is operated immediately after that, the input operation can be performed by voice in the input operation unit that was started earlier without being affected (by the voice input mode setting) by the input operation unit that was started later. Therefore, even if the user US accidentally touches a different input operation unit, the voice input operation that has already started is not invalidated or interrupted midway.

Furthermore, in the cooking device according to the first disclosure, the control device 40 is characterized in that, when the control device 40 validates touch input of one input key (e.g., 107) that can set the voice input mode, and enters control conditions and is in a standby state waiting for operation by the start key 113, it does not accept a voice input mode setting signal from the other input operation unit unless the standby state is cancelled by the stop key 114 for cancellation.

Because of this configuration, in a cooking device 1 equipped with multiple input operation units (central operation unit 15M and left and right operation units 15L, 15R), even if one input operation unit is operated while inputting in voice input mode, the input operation unit operated later cannot perform any valid input to the control device 40, so the original input task can be performed without being affected by the input operation unit operated later (voice input mode setting). Therefore, even if the user US accidentally touches a different input operation unit, the voice input task of the original input operation unit will not be inadvertently disabled or interrupted.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, a cooking system according to the second disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the heating and cooking system according to the second disclosure includes:
A cooking device 1 for heating an object to be heated N;
The cooking device includes a cloud server 300 or a communication terminal 200 that is connected to the cooking device 1 by wireless communication,
The communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 has a function of transmitting recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1,
The cooking appliance 1 has a function of acquiring the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 after the standby initial screen 16MH (16LH, 16RH) is displayed,
The cooking device 1 has operation units 16M, 16L, and 16R each having touch-type input keys 107, 108, and 109,
The operation units 16M, 16L, and 16R have a function of selecting one cooking mode and a function of switching from a touch input mode to a voice input mode according to the touch state of the input keys 107, 108, and 109,
The cooking device 1 is provided with a dial-type selection means 123 for selecting one of a plurality of linked cooking menus or a plurality of control menus for cooking in the cooking mode in response to a rotation operation;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

Because of this configuration, the touch-type input keys 107, 108, and 109 on the input operation unit can be used to switch to voice input mode, so that the tedious input process before starting the heating operation can be input by voice. This improves operability for the user US and reduces the workload.

Furthermore, by rotating the dial-type selection means 123, cooking menu and control menu options can be easily displayed on the display unit 16 for selection, improving the operability of preparation work before starting cooking.

In addition to the above, the cooking device 1 disclosed in the first embodiment has the following characteristic configuration.
(1) At least one input key for selecting the "voice input mode 1" (for a long press) is provided for each heating cooking mode. That is, in the linked cooking menu (in the central operation unit 15M), it is the input key 107. In the composite cooking mode KM2 (in the central operation unit 15M), it is the input key 108.

(2) The control menu group for the induction heating only cooking mode KM3 can be executed by heating cooking at the heating port 4R using the right operation unit 15R, and by heating cooking at the left heating port 4L using the left operation unit 15L. Therefore, input keys 109L, 109R (both not shown) are provided to select "voice input mode 1" (can be operated by "long press") in correspondence with the left and right operation units 15L, 15R.

(3) Although there are three input operation units, when an input key (e.g., 107) that can select "voice input mode 1" on one input operation unit (e.g., central operation unit 15M) is pressed (a "long press" operation) on that operation unit, the voice input mode cannot be selected in the input process of the other input operation units (in this case, left and right operation units 15L, 15R). However, in the above case, when cooking is being performed on the other input operation unit (in this case, left and right operation units 15L, 15R), that input operation unit is in touch input mode, so it is possible to operate the input keys on those left and right operation units 15L, 15R by "touch input". Therefore, the heat can be changed or heating stopped during cooking without any restrictions.

In other words, when one input key (e.g., 107) is "pressed and held" to set "voice input mode" in any one of the multiple input operation units, the voice input process for "starting a new cooking session" cannot be started in the other input operation units. In an input operation unit that is already performing cooking, input operations other than the voice input mode are possible. Therefore, cooking that is currently being performed can be controlled (e.g., stopping heating, changing heat, etc.) by operations (touching, pressing) other than voice input.

This unique configuration makes it possible to avoid simultaneous voice input at one input operation unit and another input operation unit, so when cooking at two locations simultaneously, or when cooking at one location and starting another cooking operation, there is no interference between the input commands, making it possible to execute reliable input operations and ensuring high safety.

Embodiment 2.
Figures 43 to 51 show a cooking device and a cooking system according to embodiment 2. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configuration of embodiment 1 described in Figures 1 to 42 are given the same reference numerals.

In this second embodiment, the configuration of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration of the cloud server 300 has also been changed.

In this second embodiment, too, when the restriction unit 55 acquires recipe data (including the "display condition data") from an external communication terminal 200 or the like, it restricts some of the input functions and display functions on the cooking appliance 1 side. To this end, the data acquisition unit 53 issues various control commands via the communication unit 51 in response to the operation of acquiring recipe data from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300.

Referring to Figure 43 .
A refrigerator 403 and a cooking appliance 1 are installed inside the kitchen 601, and the refrigerator 403 and the cooking appliance 1 can transmit and receive information to and from the wireless router 340 via wireless communication.

The wireless router 340 also serves as an access point to a network NW such as the Internet, etc. The wireless router 340 can access the first server 321 in an external space.
In this embodiment 2, the cloud server 300 described in the first embodiment includes a first server 321, a second server 322, a recipe data providing server 301, and a food component information server 326 described later.

The cooking device 1 can acquire at least recipe data CD through wireless communication with the communication terminal (smartphone, etc.) 200. This recipe data CD includes not only cooking control data for executing the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM1, but also cooking control data for the combined cooking mode KM2.

In this second embodiment, the communication terminal 200 can directly communicate with the wireless router 340 for the cooking appliance 1. The basic configuration of this communication terminal 200 is the same as that of the communication terminal 200 described in the first embodiment.

As will be described in FIG. 46, the communication terminal 200 has notification data 223 and remote control data 224. The notification data 223 and remote control data 224 may be acquired by connecting to a first server 321, which is an information providing means, via a network NW and downloading the data from the first server 321.

The cooking appliance database 217 also stores food ingredient and nutritional component data 226, which is obtained via the second server 322 from a food ingredient information server 326 that provides various types of food ingredient information. The symbol DD is food ingredient information that includes both food ingredient and nutritional component data.

The food composition information server 326 may use data from, for example, the "Standard Tables of Food Composition in Japan" published by the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology.

The communication terminal 200 can transmit recipe data CD and remote control information RS, such as commands to perform cooking operations, to the cooking appliance 1.

The communication terminal 200 has a voice input unit 222 (see FIG. 46) that converts voice from the user US into a predetermined voice input signal VS.
Therefore, when the user US speaks into this communication terminal 200, a voice input signal (voice data) VS can be transmitted to the second server 322. In other words, necessary input operations can be performed without touching the touch operation unit 215 (see FIG. 46).

When the cooking appliance 1 is activated, the user US can provide speech information to the communication terminal 200 by voice, for example, to extract the desired recipe data CD from the recipe data providing server 301 and provide it to the cooking appliance 1.

For example, since the recipient of the voice input signal VS is the second server 322, the speech information may include, for example, "XXX (an example of a name or nickname identifying the second server 322), looking for a recipe for collaborative cooking."
The spoken information “XXX, look for a recipe” is one piece of external command information that can be applied to the cooking appliance 1.

Furthermore, the speech information "XXX, looking for a recipe for collaborative cooking" is information that specifies the cooking mode for the cooking device 1.

Furthermore, the speech information "Looking for a recipe for XXX that can be done in the microwave and induction" is speech information that extracts cooking menus that are possible in the collaborative cooking mode KM1.

This speech information can be converted into standard commands prepared in advance in the second server 322.

The speech information issued by the user US to the communication terminal 200 is converted to text data in the communication terminal 200 and transmitted to the second server 322 in the form of text data of the speech information (voice input signal VS).

The control unit 322C of the second server 322 receives text data (voice input signal VS) via the input/output unit 322A and determines whether it can be converted into a standard command stored in the memory unit 322R.

The control unit 322C converts the text data of the speech information (voice input signal VS) into various commands prepared as standard commands. The "commands" referred to here include instructions to extract recipe data for performing one cooking from the recipe database stored in the recipe data providing server 301. The input/output unit 322A is, for example, an API gateway.

The first server 321 and the second server 322 are connected by a network NW such as the Internet.
An inquiry signal (inquiry data) SN is transmitted from the input/output unit 322A of the second server 322 to the first server 321. This inquiry signal SN is, for example, a command requesting that the recipe data CD be extracted from the recipe data providing server 301. It is also a command signal generated by an input operation of the communication terminal 200 when a user wishes to know various data on the operating state of the cooking appliance 1 (for example, the contents and progress of the cooking process). In other words, these data are operation support data GS for the user US.

In addition, since the second server 322 does not require special control or processing specific to the cooking appliance 1, it is possible to use existing servers, such as servers of various systems such as AI assistants, intelligent assistants, and smart speakers.

The first server 321 shown in FIG. 43 is operated by the company (manufacturer) that manufactured the cooking appliance 1, and has a thorough understanding of the special controls and processes that are unique to the cooking appliance 1 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "cooker control information"), and is therefore able to accurately grasp the operating state of the cooking appliance 1 (including both heating and non-heating operations). The memory unit 321R stores data corresponding to the "cooker control information". Therefore, if the first server 321 acquires the operating state data OS described below, the first server 321 can accurately analyze the operating status of the cooking appliance 1 in real time.

The first server 321 transmits various "operational state data" from the cooking appliance 1 as described later.
The above information is acquired as needed via the wireless router 340.

The operating status data OS includes data indicating the ON/OFF state of the main power switch 20, selection data for the combined cooking mode KM1, data on control conditions such as heating temperature and heating time, and the latest temperature measurement data for the top plate 3 and heating chamber 6.

The recipe data providing server 301 is capable of wirelessly communicating with the first server 321 to exchange information. Note that a "system control server" that acts as a control means for linking the recipe data providing server 301, the first server 321, the recipe data providing server 301, etc. is not shown.

The recipe data providing server 301 may be incorporated and integrated into the first server 321. The food ingredient information server 326 is connected to the first server 321 via a wired or wireless communication network NW.

The first server 321 is configured so that each cooking appliance 1 is preregistered, and the operating status data OS transmitted from each cooking appliance 1 is acquired in association with the user US of the cooking appliance 1.

The first server 321 has an input/output unit 321A for individually performing wireless communication with the wireless router 340 and the second server 322. This input/output unit 321A is, for example, an API gateway. This input/output unit 321 receives recipe data from the recipe data providing server 301.

The first server 321 includes a controller 321C. The controller 321C decodes an inquiry signal (command) SN from the second server 321, generates necessary control information in response to the inquiry signal SN, and transmits the control information to the second server 322.
In addition, the operating status data OS transmitted from a large number of heating cookers 1 and a user US ID (specific information) that identifies the user US of each heating cooker 1 are analyzed, and the heating cooker 1 of each user US is identified from information in the user US identification database held in the memory unit 321R.

The first server 321 has a database of the control of each preregistered cooking appliance 1 in the memory unit 321R. Therefore, if the data requested by a cooking appliance 1 does not match the cooking appliance 1, the data is not transmitted.

Similarly, even if the first server 321 receives a query signal SN from the communication terminal 200, it transmits specific operation support data GS via the second server to the communication terminal 200 in a set with data such as device identification information. For this reason, for example, if the communication terminal 200 inputs control conditions that are not compatible with specific recipe data CD, the first server 321 does not accept such input, or notifies the communication terminal 200 of the reason for not accepting it. For this reason, in the case of voice input mode, if the control conditions input (spoken) by the user via the communication terminal 200 exceed the range permitted by the cooking appliance 1, a notification is sent to the communication terminal 200, which requests the input of different control conditions.

Furthermore, the first server 321 also has a function of controlling the timing of providing the recipe data CD for a specific cooking menu and various command data acquired from the recipe data providing server 301 to the second server 322. This will be explained in detail later.

In FIG. 43, 321S is a command data generating section that generates "command data" (hereinafter referred to as the "command generating section").
In the second embodiment, the “command data” is a command from the first server 20 to set the operating conditions of the cooking appliance 1 .
In the second embodiment, the command data is divided into the following types:
(1) First command data: data that specifies the "operating conditions" of the cooking menu or control menu of the cooking device 1 (including heat power during cooking, heating operation time, target temperature for stopping heating, etc.).
(2) Second command data: This data specifies that the cooking appliance 1 should start a specified operation after a specified time has elapsed or at a specified time (however, the start of a heating operation cannot be specified).
(3) Third command data: requesting provision of status information of the cooking appliance 1. For example, requesting provision of electrical data of a specified portion, part, etc., and physical data of temperature, etc.
(4) Fourth command data: data for restricting or stopping the operation conditions of the electric appliance 1. For example, this refers to a command to reduce the maximum power consumption of a specific electric appliance 1 (peak cut) in response to power reduction information or tightness information from a power company.

When the cooking appliance 1 receives the first command data, and when it completes the reception process of the first command data, if it is to immediately start operation, it notifies the user in advance using a notification means 90 such as the display unit 16 from a safety standpoint, and operation is not started until the user US performs some kind of confirmation input (touch input) on the input operation unit 15 or inputs to start operation using the start key 113.

In the following explanation, when the term "command data" is used, it refers to a case that includes at least one of the first through fourth command data.

When the cooking appliance 1 obtains the command data CD from an external device (including the first server 321), the cooking appliance 1 receives a setting command (control command) signal requesting compliance with the above-mentioned operating conditions.
After that, the cooking appliance 1 further receives a status command (state confirmation) signal.
In response to this, the cooking appliance 1 receives the setting command (control command) signal and replies with the latest status indicating the state of the cooking appliance 1 as a "status command response (state confirmation response)" signal.
By repeating such transmission and reply several times, the cooking appliance 1 is controlled in accordance with the command data from the first server 321. In the following description, such detailed description will be omitted.

When the first server 321 constantly monitors the operation of the cooking appliance 1, it does not send or receive the setting command (control command) signal, but instead repeatedly communicates two types of signals at a specified monitoring time interval (e.g., 5 minutes): a status command (status check) signal and a "status command response (status check response)" signal in response to the status command. If the status of the cooking appliance 1 changes during the 5-minute monitoring period, a "status command response (status check response)" signal is immediately sent to the first server 321 at that point.

In this second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, an input key 180 for selecting a voice input is arranged in the central operation section 15M of the input operation section 15. This input key 180 may be a mechanical switch, or may be an input key of a touch-type input switch like the input key 107.

Next, we will explain Figure 44.
FIG. 44 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the cooking appliance 1, and corresponds to FIG. 8 of the first embodiment.
As is clear from Fig. 44, the control device 40 of the second embodiment does not have a configuration corresponding to the voice signal analysis unit 58 shown in Fig. 8 of the first embodiment. In other words, the control device 40 does not have a function of receiving a voice signal from the outside and analyzing it.

The control device 40 of this embodiment 2 does not have a configuration equivalent to the audio signal receiving unit 56 shown in FIG. 8 of the first embodiment. In other words, the input operation unit 15 of this embodiment 2 does not have a function for receiving an audio signal from the outside. The other configurations are the same as those shown in FIG. 8 of the first embodiment, so duplicated explanations will be omitted.

Next, we will explain Figure 45.
Fig. 45 is a block diagram for explaining the relationship between the control device 40 and the central operation unit 15M. Fig. 45 corresponds to Fig. 9 of the first embodiment. The right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L basically have the same configuration as the central operation unit 15M.

As is clear from Fig. 45, the control device 40 has an input signal analysis section 52. This input signal analysis section 52 has an input mode determination section 52C.
The input mode determination unit 52C receives the measurement time data MJ from the input operation unit 15 (15M, 15L, 15R), and if the measurement time data MJ is 5 seconds or more, with a predetermined threshold (for example, 5 seconds) as the boundary, determines that the input mode is "voice input mode 1." If the measurement time data MJ is less than this threshold, the input mode determination unit 52C determines that the input mode is a normal "short press" operation.

The "measurement time data MJ" input from the input operation unit 15 to the control device 40 corresponds to the "voice input mode corresponding signal" MC1 described in the first embodiment.

Meanwhile, each of the input operation units 15L, 15M, 15L including the central operation unit 15M is provided with a time measurement unit 15T. Measured time data MJ measured by the time measurement unit 15T is transmitted as is to the input signal analysis unit 52 of the control device 40.
That is, the time measurement unit 15 T measures the “touch time” from when the user US touches the screen with his/her finger until when he/she releases the touch screen, and transmits the measured time data MJ to the input signal analysis unit 52 .

The input mode determination unit 52C analyzes the measured time data MJ (corresponding to the voice input mode corresponding signal MC1), and if it determines that the setting conditions for "voice input mode 1" are met, it outputs an input mode switching signal MC2 to the input processing unit 70. For example, if the measured time data MJ is time data with a length equal to or longer than a threshold value (e.g., 5 seconds), it is determined that the setting conditions for voice input mode 1 are met, and the input mode switching signal MC2 is output. Note that the input mode switching signal MC2 is not shown in FIG. 45.

15D is a storage unit. This storage unit 15D stores various control parameters such as the touch detection unit 15A and the time measurement unit 15T described above, program information for the judgment process, etc.

Reference numeral 15E denotes a central processing unit (CPU) that performs various information processing operations as an input operation unit (central operation unit 15M).
An input signal transmitting section 15F transmits the above-mentioned unique identification signal of the input key, the measured time data MJ of the “touch time”, and the like to the input signal analyzing section 52 of the control device 40.

In FIG. 45, the touch detection unit 15A, the time measurement unit 15T, the memory unit 15D, etc. are depicted as individual independent blocks, but each of these functions may be realized, for example, by software on a single microcomputer, rather than being configured as separate components on hardware.

Although FIG. 45 shows an example of the central operation unit 15M, the control device 40 also identifies the input of the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L as being from each operation unit. Therefore, in the input key identification unit 15A in the right operation unit 15R, data identifying the input key present in the right operation unit 15R is included in the signal from the input key and transmitted to the control device 40. The same applies to the left operation unit 15L.

Upon receiving the input mode switching signal MC2, the input processing unit 70 goes into an input standby state in preparation for any input related to the recipe data CD from the first server 321.

Next, a communication terminal 200 shown in FIG. 46 will be described.
The communication terminal 200 such as a smartphone has a transmission unit and a reception unit 210, a communication control unit 211, a central processing unit (CPU) 212, a ROM and a RAM 213, a speaker 214, a touch-type operation unit 215, a terminal side display unit 216 having a display screen, a cooking appliance database (storage unit) 217, a posture detection unit 218, a remote operation information generation unit 219, and a storage unit 220. The transmission unit and reception unit 210 has an NFC input/output unit 221 for short-range wireless communication. Therefore, two paths, wireless communication via the Internet and short-range wireless communication (NFC), can be used.

Reference numeral 222 denotes a voice input unit that converts the voice of a user US or the like into an input signal.
The touch-type operation unit 215, the terminal side display unit 216, and the voice input unit 222 are integrated in hardware to form a display operation unit 225. Note that a search unit that analyzes the voice signal from the voice input unit 222 and performs term search, information search, etc. is not shown. The search unit may be provided inside the communication terminal 200, or may be provided in an external cloud server 300, so that the search function is provided outside the communication terminal 200.

The attitude detection unit 218 is equipped with various sensors such as a gyro sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a gravity sensor, and can detect the inclination and orientation of the communication terminal 200. As a result, a signal that detects the up-down direction of the communication terminal 200 is output to the central processing unit 212.

The central processing unit 212 receives a detection signal from the attitude detection unit 218 and controls the display direction of the terminal side display unit 216 .
The central processing unit 212 inputs a signal received from the communication unit 51 of the cooking appliance 1 to the remote operation information generating unit 219 .

The central processing unit 212 has a recipe data acquisition unit 230, a recipe data transmission unit 231, a terminal side recipe selection unit 232, and a food composition data acquisition unit 233. The recipe data acquisition unit 230, the recipe data transmission unit 231, the terminal side recipe selection unit 232, and the food composition data acquisition unit 233 may be functionally realized as a whole by a single computer program, or may be configured by separate control circuits.

The cooking appliance database 217 holds “notification data” 223 of the cooking appliance 1 in order to generate notification information (including image information) for the central display unit 16M and the audio notification unit 50 of the cooking appliance 1 .
The cooker database 217 also holds “remote control data” 224 for the control device 40 of the cooker 1 .

Furthermore, the cooking appliance database 217 stores food ingredient and nutrient ingredient data 226 related to the recipe data CD. In this embodiment, information on food ingredients (energy, lipids, proteins, etc.) and nutrient ingredients (potassium, calcium, etc.) is collectively referred to as "food ingredient information" DD.

The notification data 223, remote control data 224, and food ingredient/nutrient ingredient data 226 may be stored in the communication terminal 200 from the beginning, or may be connected to a cloud server 300, which is an information providing means, via a network NW (201, 202) and downloaded from the cloud server 300 to obtain the food ingredient information DD. In other words, the cooking appliance database 217 does not need to be constructed with fixed storage, and may be in a form in which information is obtained as needed and temporarily stored in a volatile memory.

The cooking appliance database 217 may obtain recipe data CD for various cooking methods that can be performed by the cooking appliance 1, particularly for cooking menus (e.g., "Ratatouille") that can be used in the collaborative cooking mode KM1, from the cloud server 300 or from another communication terminal 200 via the NFC input/output unit 221.

The remote control information generating unit 224 processes the signal acquired from the cooking appliance 1 via the central processing unit 212 and the input signal from the display operation unit 225, and generates remote control information for the cooking appliance 1.

The "remote operation information" referred to here includes information related to input operations corresponding to all cooking modes of the cooking appliance 1, including the linked cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2, display information of the central display unit 16M in the linked cooking mode, combined cooking mode, etc., and display information related to the right display unit 16R and the left display unit 16L. However, in all cooking modes, including the linked cooking mode KM1, information that serves as a command to start a heating operation is not included. Therefore, this remote operation information does not cause the cooking appliance 1 to start a heating operation.

The "remote operation information" may not include the display information of the center display unit 16M and the display information of the right display unit 16R and the left display unit 16L. In addition, command information for the functions that can be set using the function setting key 115 cannot be transmitted from the communication terminal 200, and cannot be generated by the communication terminal 200. In other words, the function setting mode of the cooking appliance 1 cannot be activated from the communication terminal 200.

The central processing unit 212 executes the overall processing of the communication terminal 200 according to the control programs stored in the ROM/RAM, reading data required in the process of executing the processing from the ROM/RAM, and storing data generated in the process of executing the processing in the ROM/RAM.

The storage unit 220 is a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can store information about the cooking appliance 1 that is read from the transmission unit and the reception unit 210. For example, it is used to temporarily store the recipe data CD for a specific cooking menu that is downloaded (read) from the cloud server 300.

Information on the cooking appliance 1 is obtained from a first server 321 that is directly connected to the cooking appliance 1, but it may also be obtained via a second server 322 that is connected to the first server 321 via a network NW. The first server 321 and the second server 322 are part of the cloud server 300 (see FIG. 43).

When the user US touches a specific portion of the terminal display unit 216 of the communication terminal 200, the remote operation information generating unit 219 generates remote operation information based on this touch signal.
The remote operation information is transmitted from the transmitting and receiving unit 210 to the cooking appliance 1 .

If the cooking appliance 1 is already powered and started, the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 treats the received remote operation information as input operation information for a cooking mode. For example, when a remote operation signal related to the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is received, the standby initial screen 16MH of the central display unit 16M transitions to a selection screen (first specific screen 16M1) for one cooking menu (e.g., hamburger) in the cooperative cooking mode KM1. However, this does not mean that the cooking appliance 1 operates unconditionally in response to the remote operation information of the communication terminal 200. This will be explained in FIG. 47.

On the other hand, on the communication terminal 200 side that transmitted the remote operation information, the display on the terminal side display unit 216 changes based on the remote operation information. In other words, the contents of the display screen of the terminal side display unit 216 on the display operation unit 225 of the communication terminal 200 and the display contents of the central display unit 16M of the cooking appliance 1 change according to similar operation procedures, but the state of the change is not transmitted to the cooking appliance 1 one by one in real time.

Even if the communication terminal 200 generates remote operation information, it is only after a cooking mode confirmation signal is transmitted that the cooking appliance 1 recognizes the information as a regular remote operation signal. In other words, the remote operation information from the communication terminal 200 is transmitted all at once when a predetermined confirmation key is pressed on the communication terminal 200 to confirm the cooking mode.

Therefore, the recipe data CD of the cooking menu (e.g., hamburger) in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 includes data specifying the heating means from cooking step 1 to the final cooking step, and information on the default control conditions (e.g., heat level, heat value, heating time, etc., but not limited to these) that are transmitted in a lump. In other words, the data also includes detailed control conditions that the user US can set at will on the first specific screen 16M1. As described above, the recipe data CD here is simplified recipe data CD. The simplified recipe data CD does not include information specific to the heating means (including information indicating the attributes of the heating means and information on the heating port), cooking step information, information indicating the order of the heating means to be driven, etc., but is mainly composed of commands and data (hereinafter referred to as "commands" or "command data") that determine the control conditions such as heating capacity and heating time.
In other words, the "simplified recipe data" CD mainly consists of setting data (command data) for the control conditions.

The food component data acquisition unit 233 shown in FIG. 46 has data on the components (e.g., energy content, protein, etc.) and nutritional components (e.g., vitamins A, C, iron, minerals, etc.) of various foods. In this second embodiment, the various data are collectively referred to as "food component data."

The "food composition data" of the food composition data acquisition unit 233 does not have to be stored at the time of manufacture of the communication terminal 200. For example, in Japan, the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology has made the "Standard Tables of Food Composition in Japan" available to the public (on the Internet, etc.). Therefore, the communication terminal 200 may acquire data on specific foods from this data and store the data for each food in the food composition data acquisition unit 233.

When the food component data acquisition unit 233 acquires recipe data CD for a cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak) from the cloud server 300, if data on nutritional components, etc. for the food cannot be obtained from the cloud server 300, the food component data acquisition unit 233 can supplement the data on nutritional components, etc. in the communication terminal 200 and provide it to the cooking appliance 1. This will be described in detail later.

Next, we will explain Figure 47.
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram (table) for explaining operations when cooking in the coordinated cooking mode (using the central operation unit 15M).
The table in FIG. 47 is divided into three vertical columns and lists the operation procedures, related input keys, display screens, and characteristic items related to the operations.

When the operation button (key) 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed first, main power is supplied to the control device 40, and if the control device 40 detects no abnormalities as a result of its self-diagnosis, the central display unit 16M and input operation unit 15 are activated. The heat display unit 17 (left heat display unit 17L, central heating status display unit 17M, right heat display unit 17R) are also activated. The right display unit 16R and left display unit 16L are also activated.

A standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display section 16M.
A two-dimensional code 60B is displayed on the standby initial screen 16MH. When the communication terminal 200 optically reads the two-dimensional code 60B, it can connect to the recipe information server 301 that stores various cooking recipe information, i.e., various recipe data CD. Thus, the communication terminal 200 can obtain the recipe data CD for the desired cooking.

In this second embodiment, the communication terminal 20 can directly communicate wirelessly with the cooking appliance 1. The cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200 are also configured to automatically connect to each other when they are within a communication range.

The communication method between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking device 1 uses Bluetooth (registered trademark), which is one of the short-range wireless communication standards. A wireless router 340 is installed between the communication terminal 200 and the cloud server 300. A wireless LAN communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark) is used between the wireless router 340 and the communication terminal 200.

First, mutual authentication is performed between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, when the cooking appliance 1 starts up and transmits a signal for automatic connection (also called a "scan signal"), mutual communication for automatic connection is performed between the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200. The scan signal may also be transmitted from the communication terminal 200.

When a connection is established between the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200, the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200 continue to be able to directly communicate wirelessly with each other. If the communication terminal 200 moves with the user US and moves away from the cooking appliance 1, communication may be temporarily disabled, but if the communication terminal 200 returns to a communication range (distance), the connection is automatically restored.

During the period from when the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed until the input key 107 is pressed (to select the collaborative cooking mode KM1), acquisition of recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 is basically prohibited.

In addition, during the period from when the main power switch 20 is turned on until the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed, no recipe data CD can be obtained from the communication terminal 200.

Note that FIG. 48, which will be described later, illustrates an example in which the reception restriction on recipe data CD is not lifted from the point at which input key 180M is pressed, but rather from the point at which input key 107 (or 108 or 109) is pressed following input key 180M.

Next, we will explain Figure 48.
FIG. 48 shows an example in which the display screen configuration of FIG. 47 is slightly modified.
FIG. 47 shows an example in which, when recipe data CD is being received from an external device, text such as "Receiving recipe from an external device" is displayed on the initial standby screen 16MH.

In contrast, FIG. 48 shows an example in which the display switches to a dedicated reception operation display screen 16MM while recipe data CD is being received from an external device. The reception operation display screen 16MM will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

Next, we will explain Figure 63.
When cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the recipe data CD for one of the cooperative cooking menus (for example, "Ratatouille") is acquired.
Using the voice input unit 222 or the touch-type operation unit 215, the above-mentioned "Ratatouille" is designated in the terminal-side recipe selection unit 232, and the cloud server 300 is accessed to obtain the recipe data CD for "Ratatouille" in the recipe data acquisition unit 230.

The acquired recipe data CD for "Ratatouille" is temporarily stored in the memory unit 220. The display unit 216 on the terminal side displays a message indicating that the recipe data CD for "Ratatouille" has been successfully downloaded, and prompts the user US to decide whether or not to send it.

When the user US operates the display operation unit 225 (or inputs voice via the voice input unit 222) to instruct the recipe data transmission unit 231 to transmit, the central processing unit 212 transmits the recipe data CD for "Ratatouille" to the cooking appliance 1. Note that together with transmitting this recipe data CD, the central processing unit 212 also transmits "notification data" 223 for the cooking appliance 1 and "remote control data" 224 for the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1.

As shown in FIG. 47, after the input key 107 is pressed, the control device 40 allows the cooking appliance 1 to receive the recipe data CD for each cooking menu in the linked cooking mode KM1. However, as shown in FIG. 47, the display does not immediately switch to the first specific screen 16M1. Therefore, the display changes from the standby initial screen 16MH to the reception operation display screen 16MM, and the reception operation of the recipe data CD continues.

The example in FIG. 49 shows a display example in which the recipe data CD for the above-mentioned "Ratatouille" is being received from the communication terminal 200. As shown in FIG. 49, the initial standby screen 16MH switches to a reception operation display screen 16MM, which shows that a recipe is being received from outside. The reception operation display screen 16MM is shown in FIG. 49.

The limiting section 55 of the cooking appliance 1 can execute the operation of receiving the recipe data CD via the communication section 51 from the point in time when the input key 107 is pressed.
Then, if there is received recipe data CD, it is temporarily stored as a recipe in a predetermined storage area (or a dedicated buffer memory) of the recipe data storage unit 42. Note that reception of the notification data 223 and remote control data 224 is also permitted, and is temporarily stored in the storage unit 42 while being linked to the recipe data CD of "Ratatouille" (processed so that it can be identified in a one-to-one relationship).

Next, when the input key 107 is pressed once more, information (identification information 167) of each cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is displayed on the central display section 16M. At that time, the display screen of the central display section 16M is not the standby initial screen 16MH but the first specific screen 16M1.

As described above, the communication terminal 200 is connected to the cloud server 300 via the network NW. Recipe data CD can be acquired via this network 201. Furthermore, if necessary, information on the standard components and nutritional components of the food (ingredient) covered by the recipe data CD is also acquired from the cloud server 300 via this network NW.

Next, we will explain Figure 49.
Fig. 49 shows an example of a specific display screen indicating that the recipe data CD for "Ratatouille" is being received from the communication terminal 200. As shown in Fig. 49(A) and (B), the initial standby screen 16MH is switched to a receiving operation display screen 16MM indicating that a recipe is being received from outside.

FIG. 49A is an enlarged schematic diagram showing the reception operation display screen 16MM.
In Figures 49(A) and (B), 16F denotes a plurality of progress marks that appear on a receiving operation display screen 16MM according to the progress of the receiving operation.

In FIG. 49B, reference numeral 174 denotes a receiving operation display section which displays in text the fact that recipe data CD is currently being received from the outside.
The progress mark 16F is of two types: a black square mark and a white square mark.
As shown in Fig. 49A, immediately after the start of the operation of receiving recipe data CD, there is one black square mark, but as the operation proceeds, the number of black square marks increases, and finally there are five black square marks lined up. As the number of black square marks increases, the same number of white square marks disappear.

The progress mark 16F may display the degree of progress by changing the size and color of a single figure, or may be expressed by animation.
Furthermore, instead of the receiving operation display screen 16MM, a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) may be provided as in the left heating power display unit 17L of the first embodiment, and the progress of the receiving operation may be displayed in a plurality of stages by the light emitted by the light. For example, at the beginning of the receiving operation, only one LED may be lit, and the number of lit LEDs may be increased as the receiving operation progresses. Alternatively, the progress may be expressed by switching the blinking or color of the LED. This may allow the user US to be informed of the completion of the receiving operation in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner.

After the first specific screen 16M1 displays as shown in Figure 49 (B), the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, and the first area 22 of the first specific screen 16M1 displays identification information 167 of a specific (one) collaborative cooking menu (in this case, "Ratatouille").
Thereafter, by touching the start key 113, the heating and cooking operation can be started.

Furthermore, by operating the stop key 114, cooking using the specific linked cooking menu thus obtained from outside (in this case, "Ratatouille") can be canceled. Once a cancellation operation is performed in this way, the screen returns to the initial standby screen 16MH, and in this state, it is necessary to touch the input key 107 again.

In this way, once the recipe data CD corresponding to one cooking menu previously acquired is cancelled, recipe data CD for another cooking menu can be acquired again (it is also possible to acquire recipe data CD for the same cooking menu again).

Furthermore, a specific linked cooking menu obtained from outside (in this case, recipe data for "Ratatouille") cannot be changed to another linked cooking menu (for example, "Hamburger steak") if the cooking process for that linked cooking menu has not been completed (including cases where the user US forcibly cancels the cooking process midway). To change it, it is necessary to operate the stop key 114 and return to the scene of the initial standby screen 16MH.

In this second embodiment, the voice input mode display information 179D (see FIG. 37) is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 after the recipe data CD has been successfully acquired.

In this second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the cooking appliance 1 itself does not have an audio signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 8; a speaker, audio signal receiving circuit, etc.), so audio input must be performed via the communication terminal 200 (a smartphone, audio input/output device, etc.).

As is clear from the above description, the cooking device 1 according to the second embodiment has the following configuration.
A first heating means HM1 including a first heating section (right heating section) 4R and a second heating section (left heating section) 4L;
a second heating means HM2 capable of heating the food to be cooked in a heating chamber 6 located away from the first heating means HM1 with microwaves;
A control device 40 that controls the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1;
a display unit 16M that displays control information of the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1;
The control device 40 has a number of cooperative cooking menus KM3 for cooking one food item using the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1, the number of which is equal to the number of food items to be cooked,
The control device 40 is configured to carry out the following operations when a command to display an integrated cooking menu is received from the input key 107.

(1) The relationship between the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1, such as "not having been used before," and the "permission condition" of "the temperature in the heating chamber 6 being low," is determined. Then, it is determined whether the recipe data CD of the linked cooking menu (for example, "Ratatouille") can be executed. Note that "Ratatouille" is cooked by first heating with the first heating means HM1 and then heating with microwaves in the heating chamber 6 to complete the cooking.

(2) If it is determined that the collaborative cooking menu can be executed, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display unit 16M.

(3) At least one of the linked cooking menus is displayed in a selectable manner on the first specific screen 16M1. To do so, the input function of the corresponding input key 107 (in the first area 22) is enabled.

(4) When one linked cooking menu is selected, the control conditions (heat, heating time, etc.) to be applied to that cooking menu are displayed (first specific screen 16M1). In this state, it is displayed that the voice input mode is supported (or the voice notification unit 50 notifies the user). Specifically, the voice input mode display information 179D indicating that voice input is being accepted is displayed. Then, a command to start the linked cooking mode KM1 from the input key 113 is awaited. At this stage, the user US selects either the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L (either may be determined by default). The right display unit 16R or left display unit 16L corresponding to the selected heating port is also activated.

(5) When a command to start the linked cooking mode is received from the start key 113 of the central operation unit 15M, the first heating source 19L or the second heating source 19R of the first heating means HM1 starts induction heating. Note that, at that time, induction heating may be started on the condition that the input key 191R or 191L is touched.

(6) When cooking step 1 is completed automatically or by command of the user US, the heating pause period P3 is entered. Then, a command to resume the linked cooking mode (for cooking step 2) from the input key 113 is awaited.

(7) The start of cooking process 2 is handled by the central operation unit 16M, which is responsible for the heating chamber 6. Therefore, when a command to start the linked cooking mode is received from the input key 113 of the central operation unit 15M, microwaves from the second heating means HM2 are supplied to the heating chamber 6, and cooking process 2 is started.

Then, by pressing the stop key 114 on the central operation unit 15M, cooking process 2 will end and all cooking processes will be completed.

As described above, in this embodiment 2, when the predefined permission conditions are met, the first specific screen 16M1 for the coordinated cooking mode is displayed, and this display screen makes it possible to easily proceed with the transition to the coordinated cooking mode KM1 using the relevant right heating port 4R or left heating port 4L and second heating means HM2.
In addition, if the permission conditions are not satisfied, the first specific screen 16M1 itself is not displayed, so there is no concern that the user US may misuse or misunderstand the first specific screen 16M1. In other words, a highly convenient combined heating cooker can be realized without impairing the operability of the user US.

Furthermore, there is a heating pause period P3 between cooking steps 1 and 2, and the length of this heating pause period P3 is determined by the timing at which the user US issues a cooking restart command using the input key 113.
That is, in this embodiment 2, the time required to check the degree of heating of the food in cooking step 1, add seasonings, or add another food and perform cooking step 2 can be secured. This makes it easy to use and expands the cooking repertoire of the user US.

Furthermore, because of the restriction unit 55, once the input key 113 is touched for one specific linked cooking menu A, the control device 40 will not acquire recipe data CD for another linked cooking menu C from the outside via the communication unit 51. Therefore, another cooking menu (including the control menu for the combined cooking mode or the control menu for the single cooking mode) will not be inadvertently received during linked cooking. Therefore, there is no concern about confusion of the user US due to reception or operational interference on the cooking appliance 1 side.

In addition, even after the start key 113 is touched for one particular linked cooking menu A, if the stop key 114 on the central operation unit 15M or, for example, the stop key 114R (not shown) on the right operation unit 15R is operated during the cooking process of the linked cooking menu A (e.g., "hamburger steak") to stop (cancel) the cooking in the linked cooking mode, the control device 40 can obtain the recipe data CD for a new linked cooking menu C via the communication unit 51.

Next, we will explain Figure 50.
50 shows the display contents of the terminal side display screen (also used as an input operation screen) 216 of the communication terminal 200, which will be described below. The "terminal side display screen" 216 will be referred to as the "display screen" 216 hereinafter.
50(A) and (B) are enlarged views of display screen 216 of communication terminal 200. FIG.
The display screen 216 is formed by covering the surface of a liquid crystal display screen or an organic EL display screen with a glass plate.
Although not appearing as a physical structure on the upper surface (front surface) of the glass plate, various icons (input keys) 496, 523, etc., which will be described later, can be visually recognized by displaying them on the display screen 216. Although specific parts of the glass plate itself do not emit light or generate images, in the following explanation, the expression "displayed on the display screen" is used from the standpoint of a user US who visually recognizes the display of characters, figures, and other information.

The "icons" allow the user to perform desired input. In other words, each icon has a capacitance sensing key. When the user touches the icon, the touch-type operation unit 215 (see Figure 46) generates a command signal for the central processing unit 212.

To indicate the presence and function of an icon, a specific function is displayed in text or graphics (at least when it is capable of accepting input). For example, as in the example of FIG. 50(A), text information such as "View in detail" and "Decide" are displayed at the location of icons 523 and 496.

Reference numeral 515 denotes a display section for a recommended menu.
A recommended menu display section 516 may include a recommended cooking menu (another cooking) searched for from inventory information previously acquired from the refrigerator 403 (see FIG. 1).

The example of FIG. 50(A) shows a scene in which the cooking appliance 1 is currently cooking the "fried chicken" menu in the coordinated cooking mode KM1.
50(A) suggests that after the heating chamber 6 currently being used for the cooking menu "fried chicken" becomes unused (in cooking step 2), there is another recommended cooking menu that can be cooked in the heating chamber 6. Note that the cooking appliance 1 has a function of acquiring inventory information of the refrigerator 403 through wireless communication with the refrigerator 403.

At the stage of FIG. 50(A), the recommended menu may not be automatically displayed in detail. In that case, when the user US touches the detailed display instruction section (icon) 523 that is displayed for the first time at this stage, the details of the recommended menu may be displayed (on the display section 515) as shown in FIG. 50(B).

The selection section corresponding to the detailed display instruction section (icon) 523 as shown in FIG. 50(A) is not displayed on the central display section 16M of the cooking device 1. After a certain period of time, the screen in FIG. 50(B) automatically returns to the display screen 216 in FIG. 50(A).

In Figures 50 (A) and (B), 487 is a display section for the name of the collaborative cooking menu, and in this case, the name of the food to be cooked, "fried chicken," is displayed. This communication terminal 200 has a scroll function that, when the user US moves their fingertip FG while touching the display screen 216, moves the display screen accordingly, thereby switching screens.

Reference numeral 496 denotes an input key (icon) for selecting one of the recommended menus in FIG.
50(A), information on the recommended frozen food (ingredient) and its food component information are displayed in the recommendation menu display section 516. In this case, the data on the food components is obtained from the food component data acquisition section 233 of the communication terminal 200.

In other words, at the stage shown in Figure 50 (A), the data on food ingredients and food nutritional ingredients held in the cooking appliance database 217 can be displayed.

Even if there is no data on food ingredients, etc. in the cooking appliance database 217, data on food ingredients and food nutritional ingredients (ingredient data DD) can be obtained from the cloud server 300 (food ingredient information server 326) at any time. In addition, in the collaborative cooking mode KM1, there is a transition period TR during which the cooking operation is temporarily paused, so this period can be used to obtain data.

Figure 50 (B) shows the state in which the display content changes when the detailed display instruction section (icon) 523 is operated in the state shown in Figure 50 (A). As shown in this Figure 50 (B), the recommended menu display section 515 displays information about the recommended frozen food (ingredient), as well as the standard composition and nutritional composition of that food.

In Figures 50 (A) and (B), 517 is auxiliary information for the recommended menu, indicating that cooking can be done using the "warm" control menu that utilizes microwave heating.
Reference numeral 518 denotes a cooking reference image for the recommended menu. This may be an illustration (conceptual image) instead of a photograph.

Next, we will explain Figure 51.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the communication terminal 200 when the recipe data CD is acquired from the cloud server 300 (recipe information providing server 301).

When the recipe data CD is received and processed by the communication terminal 200 (step SL1), in the next step SL2, the food identification information in the recipe data CD is compared with the food ingredient data and nutritional ingredient data stored in the cooking appliance database 217.

For example, for the above-mentioned cooking menu "Ratatouille", it is determined whether or not the cooking appliance database 217 contains food component data and nutritional component data.
If there is no corresponding data, the determination result of step SL3 is "No", and the process proceeds to the next step SL4.

In step SL4, a request is made to the cloud server 300 (second server 322) via the network NW to transmit food composition data and nutritional composition data for the specific cooking menu item "Ratatouille."

For example, if the cloud server 300 is configured to include a first server 321 and a second server 322 directly connected to the communication terminal 200 via a network NW, as described in FIG. 43, this component data provision request X is sent to the second server 322, and the second server 322 transmits the component data provision request X (inquiry signal SN shown in FIG. 43) to the first server 321.

In this way, when the first server 321 receives the component data request X, it acquires food component data and nutritional component data from a database (or food component information server 326) such as the "Standard Tables of Food Composition in Japan" that the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology has made publicly available (on the Internet, etc.) as described above. Then, it transmits the acquired data (component data DD) to the communication terminal 200 via the second server 322. In this way, in step SL4, food component data and nutritional component data (component data DD) are acquired from outside.

The food data acquisition unit 233 checks the received food composition data and nutritional composition data (step SL5), and if there are no problems, stores the data in the cooking appliance database 217 (step SL6). If the food composition data and nutritional composition data cannot be acquired, the process proceeds to step SL8, where a predetermined error process is performed. The details of the error are displayed on the display screen 216.

If the food component data and nutritional component data (component data DD) are stored in the cooking appliance database 217, the determination result of step SL3 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SL7. Also, if the food component data and nutritional component data (component data DD) are successfully acquired from outside, the process proceeds to step SL7.

In step SL7, a display is displayed on the display screen 216 waiting for the user US to decide whether or not to transmit the food composition data and nutritional composition data, and the device enters a standby state for transmission to the cooking appliance 1. When the user US performs a specified transmission operation, the food composition data and nutritional composition data (component data DD) are transmitted to the cooking appliance 1 simultaneously with the recipe data CD2 already acquired (for example, for cooking "Ratatouille").

In the above explanation, the user US mainly touches the touch operation unit 215 to acquire and transmit food component data and nutritional component data (component data DD), but this can also be done by voice input.

As described in FIG. 46, the display operation unit 225 has a voice input unit 222, so the user US can obtain the relevant data from outside by, for example, speaking into the voice input unit 222, such as "Get data, ratatouille."

On the other hand, in addition to the operation of acquiring specific recipe data CD (e.g., "Ratatouille") from the cloud server 300, the communication terminal 200 also has a function that allows the user US to search for various recipe data CD stored in the cooking appliance database 217, for example, using food ingredients or food nutrients as keywords.

For this reason, for example, by uttering "Search for cooking menu, calories, low" once or several times to the voice input unit 222, it is possible to preferentially select recipes with low energy amounts (calorie equivalent values) within the range of various recipe data CD stored in the cooking appliance database 217. For example, cooking menus can be displayed on the display screen 216 in order from lowest calorie value.

In the above description, the communication terminal 200 such as a smartphone performs wireless communication 400 with the cooking appliance 1 using Bluetooth (registered trademark). As an alternative method, since the communication terminal 200 has an NFC input/output unit 221 (see FIG. 46) for short-distance wireless communication, the communication terminal 200 may be brought into close proximity or in direct contact with an NFC input/output unit (not shown) on the cooking appliance 1 for input.

Summary of embodiment 2.
As is clear from the above description, in the second embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the third disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device according to the third disclosure is as follows:
A main body 2 and
A heating chamber 6 formed inside the main body 2;
A first heating means HM1 for heating an object N placed on an upper surface of the main body 2;
A second heating means HM2 for cooking in the heating chamber 6;
an input operation unit 15 for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
A notification means 90;
an input signal analysis unit 52 that determines an input from the input operation unit 15;
a control unit 40 that receives commands from the input operation unit 15;
The input operation unit 15 includes first selection means (input keys) 107, 108, 109 for selecting one of a plurality of (linked, combined, independent) cooking modes KM1 to KM3 using the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, and a second selection means 123 for selecting one cooking menu or control menu from the cooking modes selected by the first selection means,
The first selection means 107, 108, 109 are touch-type input keys provided for each of the cooking modes,
The input operation unit 15 determines a command for a voice input mode from time information corresponding to the touch operation of the first selection means 107, 108, and 109,
The second selection means 123 is a dial-type selection means,
when the control device 40 determines that the input signal analysis unit 52 has received the voice input mode command, the control device 40 enables acquisition of the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 and receives a command to set a control condition of the recipe data CD;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

Because of this configuration, the touch-type input keys 107, 108, and 109 on the input operation unit 15 can be used to switch to voice input mode, so that the tedious input process before starting the heating operation can be input by voice. This improves operability for the user US and reduces the workload.

Furthermore, by rotating the dial-type selection means 123, cooking menu and control menu options can be easily displayed on the display unit 16 for selection, improving the operability of preparation work before starting cooking.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of this second embodiment, the timing of acquiring various recipe data CD from outside can be controlled by a specified input key such as the input key 107 of the input operation unit 15. In addition, by using such touch-type input keys 107, 108, etc., it is possible to switch to a voice input mode, so that the troublesome input process before starting the heating operation can be input by voice. This improves the operability of the user US and reduces the workload.

Furthermore, in the input operation unit 15, the touch time of the touch-type input keys 107 to 109 is not measured and the voice input mode is not determined based on the measurement. Instead, the voice input mode is determined by the input signal analysis unit 52 of the control device 40.
Therefore, as explained in the second embodiment, even if there are a plurality of (three) input operation units 15, it is possible to configure the control device 40 to process the voice input mode centrally without providing each input operation unit (15M, 15L, 15R) with a voice input mode discrimination unit. That is, in the first embodiment, each input operation unit 15 is provided with a time measurement unit 15T and an input mode discrimination unit 15C, but these functions can be consolidated on the control device 40 side.

Furthermore, in this second embodiment, a heat cooking system related to the fourth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the heating and cooking system according to the fourth disclosure is as follows:
A cooking device 1 for heating an object to be heated N;
A cloud server 300 (a first server 321, a second server 322, etc.) connected to the cooking appliance 1 via a network NW by wireless communication;
Equipped with
The cloud server 300 has a function of transmitting recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1,
The cooking device 1 has a function of switching between a touch input mode and a voice input mode according to a touch state of a touch input key, and a function of selecting at least one of a cooking menu, a control menu, and a control condition by a dial-type selection means for each cooking mode selected in the touch input mode,
The cooking appliance 1 is in a standby state for acquiring the recipe data CD while being switched to the voice input mode,
When the cloud server 300 receives a request to provide the recipe data CD, the cloud server 300 transmits the recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1,
The cooking appliance 1 inputs control conditions related to the acquired recipe data CD in the voice input mode.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

According to the cooking system of the fourth disclosure, cooking can be performed using recipe data CD acquired from outside via a network.
In addition, when recipe data is acquired, the mode is automatically changed to voice input mode, so that when inputting control conditions related to the subsequently acquired recipe data, it is possible to input by voice, which contributes to improving the efficiency of input operations for the user US and reducing the input burden.

Furthermore, by rotating the dial-type selection means 123, at least one of the cooking menu, control menu, and control conditions can be easily selected, improving the operability of preparation work before starting cooking.

Furthermore, the cooking system of the fourth disclosure includes
A communication terminal 200 capable of communicating with the cooking device 1 and having a terminal side operation unit (display operation unit) 225 that accepts input from a user US and a terminal side display unit 216 that displays information;
A cloud server 300 connected to the communication terminal 200 via a network NW by wireless communication;
Equipped with
The cloud server 300 has a function of transmitting the recipe data CD for the cooking appliance 1 in response to a request from the communication terminal 200,
The communication terminal 200 has a function of transmitting command information input to the terminal side operation unit 225 to a cloud server 300, and a function of displaying information of recipe data CD received from the cloud server on the terminal side display unit 216,
The communication terminal 200 has a function of narrowing down food ingredients or nutritional ingredients of a cooking menu that is a target of the recipe data CD to be transmitted to the cooking appliance 1 from a database (cooking appliance database 217) that the communication terminal 200 has;
The communication terminal 200 has a function of transmitting, to the cooking appliance 1, the recipe data CD that can be executed and information indicating amounts of food ingredients or nutritional ingredients of the cooking that is the subject of the recipe data CD.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

Because of this configuration, when selecting a specific cooking menu (e.g., "Ratatouille"), information on the ingredients and nutritional components of the food related to that cooking menu can be easily obtained. This improves the convenience of the cooking menu selection operation by the user US. For example, the user US can select an appropriate cooking menu from information on the amounts of food ingredients and nutritional components depending on the situation such as family health management and dietary restrictions, which can contribute to improving eating habits.

Furthermore, within the range of various recipe data CD stored in the cooking appliance database 217, for example, recipes with a low amount of energy (calorie equivalent value) or recipes with a specific nutritional component (for example, high in iron) can be preferentially selected.
Therefore, the range of useful information that can be provided to the user US when selecting a cooking menu is expanded, and operability for the user US can be improved.

This system allows users US to easily check information on food ingredients and nutritional content in advance and select appropriate cooking menus in response to requests such as family health management and dietary restrictions, thereby contributing to improving eating habits.

In the second embodiment, similarly to the cooking appliance 1 according to the first disclosure, after the main power switch 20 is turned on, during the initial standby period TP,
(1) Provide common information to the user US during standby.
(2) After the voice input mode is selected, recipe data CD relating to the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (including recipe data of the control menus of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the independent cooking mode KM3) is made receivable.
By controlling the timing of obtaining recipe data CD from the outside, recipe data CD for another cooking menu will not be inadvertently received while selecting a cooking mode or setting control conditions.

Furthermore, the input keys 107, 108, and 109, which are the selection sections for the voice input mode, are also used as command keys that allow the acquisition of the recipe data CD, so that it is possible to avoid increasing the number of operation keys (operation sections) of the input operation section 15, and to prevent a decrease in operability for the user US.

In this second embodiment, similar to the cooking device 1 in the first embodiment, the restriction unit 55 is configured to restrict the acquisition of new recipe data CD until the cooking process of the acquired recipe data CD is completed.

This prevents the inadvertent reception of another cooking menu (including the control menu for the combined cooking mode or the control menu for the single cooking mode) during coordinated cooking, and allows the cooking menu of the received recipe data CD to be executed stably.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent problems with the operation of the control device 40 and to prevent misunderstandings or confusion on the part of the user US, which may occur if recipe data CD for a different cooking menu is inadvertently received during the cooking process. This improves usability for the user US.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 2, when the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed and the operation to obtain the recipe data is started, the display automatically switches to the reception operation display screen 16MM, as described in FIG. 49.

In addition, multiple progress marks 16F are displayed on the reception operation display screen 16MM according to the progress of the reception operation, so the user US can easily understand that the operation of obtaining recipe data CD is in progress, which has the effect of preventing unnecessary misunderstandings and operational errors.

In addition to or instead of displaying the progress mark 16F, the progress may be notified by voice using the voice notification unit 51. Furthermore, the progress marks are not limited to those that change in shape or number over time as shown in FIG. 49, and may be in a form that changes display color, for example.

Embodiment 3.
Fig. 52 to Fig. 54 show a cooking device according to the third embodiment. Fig. 52 is a configuration diagram of a cooking system according to the third embodiment. Fig. 53 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the cooking device shown in Fig. 52. Fig. 54 is a time chart showing the main operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking device 1 and the operation steps on the external information processing network (first server 321, audio input/output device 1000, etc.) side. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configurations of the first and second embodiments described in Figs. 1 to 51 are given the same reference numerals.

The third embodiment is significantly different from the first and second embodiments in that a steam generator (boiler) 550 is added as a fourth heating means HM4.
The configuration of the first server 321 is also significantly different.
One of the features of the third embodiment is that a small portable voice input/output device 1000 is used instead of the communication terminal 200 shown in the first and second embodiments.

First, we will explain Figure 52.
The first server 321 connected to the cooking appliance 1 via the network NW has an inventory information storage unit 1324 and an ingredient consumption determination unit 1325 .
The inventory information storage unit 1324 stores the "inventory data" SD1 transmitted from the refrigerator 403 via the network NW, and updates the inventory information as required in response to a command from the control unit 321C of the first server 321.

Similar to the first server 321, the first server 321 stores various remote operation data for the cooking appliance 1 in a memory unit 321R.
In response to a request B from the second server 322 (for example, provision of support information for inputting control conditions by voice), the control unit 322 transmits necessary operation support data GS1 to the second server 322 as required.

Therefore, the second server 322 transmits operation support data GS2, which corresponds to the operation support data GS1 and can be converted into voice data, to the voice input/output unit 1000. The user US who gives commands by voice can confirm the results of his/her own input from the voice emitted from the voice input/output unit 1000, and can receive appropriate guidance for the next input. In other words, input can be made by voice in an interactive format, and detailed conditions can be given for successively deeper layers in the control structure.

As described in the first embodiment, the inventory information storage unit 1324 may receive a signal from an information processing device 411 (not shown) called a home gateway or the like in a living space such as the kitchen 601, check the inventory status at any time, and update the inventory data SD1.

The ingredient consumption determining unit 1325 obtains ingredient information (inventory data SD1) from the inventory information storage unit 1324, and estimates the amount of ingredient consumed from the change in the inventory amount.
The ingredient consumption determining unit 1325 and the inventory information storage unit 1324 will be further described.

The inventory information storage unit 1324 stores the "inventory data" SD1 sent from the refrigerator 403 via the first server 321, and the inventory information is updated as needed in response to commands from the first server 321.

When the first server 321 receives a request for the inventory data SD1 from the communication terminal 200 described in the first embodiment, it provides the latest inventory data SD1 to the communication terminal 200. Also, as described in the first embodiment, upon receiving a request signal from an information processing device 411 (not shown) called a home gateway or the like in a living space such as the kitchen 601, the first server 321 may provide the inventory data SD1 to the information processing device 411 at any time.

As described in the first embodiment, the inventory information storage unit 1324 may receive a signal from an information processing device 411 (not shown) called a home gateway 411 or an integrated power control device (HEMS controller) in a living space such as the kitchen 601, and may check the inventory status at any time and update the inventory data SD1.

The ingredient consumption determining unit 1325 obtains ingredient information (inventory data SD1) from the inventory information storage unit 1324, and estimates the amount of ingredient consumed from the change in the inventory amount.
The ingredient consumption determination unit 1325 performs a determination each time cooking is performed. The determination is made by inputting cooking execution data CN (not shown) transmitted from the cooking appliance 1, comparing the input data with fluctuations in the inventory data SD1 acquired from the inventory information storage unit 1324, i.e., information (change information) indicating changes in the amount of ingredients, and analyzing the type and amount of ingredients actually consumed by a machine learning method. The machine learning method is not particularly limited, and for example, a known machine learning method such as neural networking is applied.

For example, when the ingredient consumption determination unit 1325 obtains data from the cooking appliance 1 on cooking "hamburger" in the linked cooking mode KM3, it compares the cooking implementation data CN on the cooking appliance 1 side with the change in the amount of each type of ingredient from the inventory data SD1 stored in the refrigerator 403. If an ingredient (e.g., 300 grams of beef) that was in the refrigerator 403 before cooking cannot be confirmed after cooking in the refrigerator 403's inventory management system (e.g., camera video data for inventory confirmation, a sensor in the corresponding freezer of the refrigerator 403, etc.), it presumes that the beef was used. Note that when making this determination, data comparing general cooking menus with the types of ingredients used is also used.

Reference numeral 1301 denotes a recipe data providing unit, which receives a command from the control unit 321C of the first server 321 and provides recipe data CD that can be executed by the cooking appliance 1.
The voice input/output device 1000, which is one of the features of the third embodiment, has a microphone (not shown) for collecting the voice of the user US, and a speaker 1001 for emitting voice. The speaker 1001 is used to inform the user of the results of the voice input, guidance for the next input, etc.
When the user US turns on the voice input/output device 1000, it is connected to a second server 322 connected via a network (wireless communication network) NW. The second server 322 has a voice translation function and a search function. The power supply of the voice input/output device 1000 and the power supply of the cooking appliance 1 are not linked at all and can be turned on and off independently of each other.

When a voice signal (voice data) VS is sent from the voice input/output device 1000, the second server 322 acquires the voice (natural language) uttered by the user US as a voice signal, converts it into a command signal (request B) from the user US, and sends it to the first server 321.

Based on the request B from the second server 322, the first server 321 can ultimately generate a remote control signal RS for the cooking appliance 1. In addition, the first server 321 can provide the cooking appliance 1 with recipe data CD acquired from the recipe data providing server 301.

That is, in the third embodiment, a configuration is not adopted in which recipe data CD is provided to the cooking appliance 1 from a communication terminal 200 such as a smartphone.
52 shows that the recipe data CD is transmitted from the first server 321 to the cooking appliance 1, and in this case, the recipe data CD includes, for example, command signals for setting the time, heat, etc. for a control menu of "warming" and a cooking menu of "hamburger steak" for the cooking appliance 1, in other words, commands (command data). Note that the recipe data CD from the first server 321 may be temporarily received by the communication terminal 200 not shown in FIG. 53 and then transmitted from the communication terminal 200 to the cooking appliance 1.

In addition, these commands may be generated and transmitted several times or more before one control menu or cooking menu is finalized by the cooking appliance 1. In particular, when the content input by the user through voice is one phrase (e.g., "warm"), in order to set the lower level command content (e.g., heating temperature or heat) required to execute it, the first server 321 generates an operation guidance command (notification command signal) such as "Please set the temperature" to the cooking appliance 1 and causes the cooking appliance 1 to notify the user, and such commands are also included in the "recipe data CD" in FIG. 52.

The first server 321 stores various remote operation data for the cooking appliance 1 in the memory unit 321R, and therefore transmits the necessary operation support data GS1 to the second server 322 as required in response to the request B from the second server 322. Therefore, the second server 322 transmits operation support data GS2, which corresponds to the operation support data GS1 and can be converted into voice data, to the voice input/output unit 1000.

With the above basic configuration, even if the user US is near the cooking appliance 1, in cases where the user US has both hands occupied preparing food or handling ingredients, and the frequency with which the user directly touches the input operation unit 15 of the cooking appliance 1 is limited, the user US can conveniently operate the cooking appliance 1 remotely using natural speech (voice).

Other configurations of the second server 322 are the same as those of the second server 322 described in the second embodiment, so duplicated explanations will be omitted.
As described in the second embodiment, the second server 322 also generates, as one type of the request B, a command to extract the desired recipe data CD from the database of the recipe information providing server 301 .

As described above, one of the features of this third embodiment is that the voice input/output device 1000, unlike the communication terminal 200 of the second embodiment, does not have the function of transmitting the desired recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1.

Furthermore, the voice input/output device 1000 can issue commands to the second server 322 regarding input operations corresponding to all cooking modes including the coordinated cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2. However, commands that are commands to start a heating operation are not included in all cooking modes including the coordinated cooking mode KM1. Therefore, it is not possible to issue a command (send a command) to start the heating operation of the cooking appliance 1 from the voice input/output device 1000 via the first server 321. This is for safety reasons.

In addition, command information for various functions that can be set using the function setting key 115 (not shown; see embodiment 1) of the cooking appliance 1 cannot be transmitted from the voice input/output device 1000, nor can it be generated by the first server 321. To switch to the function setting mode, the user US must directly touch or press the function setting key 115 of the cooking appliance 1.

In this third embodiment, a voice input/output device 1000 is provided as a means for instructing the first server 321 to transmit command data, but this is not limited to a configuration that does not use a communication terminal 200 as described in the first and second embodiments. Based on the configuration of FIG. 52, the communication terminal 200 may obtain the desired recipe data CD from the first server 321, and the communication terminal 200 may transmit the data to the cooking appliance 1.

Next, we will explain Figure 53.
The steam generator (boiler) which is the fourth heating means HM4 is installed outside the heating chamber 6, and has a function of blowing out superheated steam into the heating chamber 6. The timing of supplying the superheated steam, the supply amount per unit time, the supply time, etc. are controlled by the heating control section 43 of the control device 40.

The cooking device 1 is provided with a voice signal receiving unit 56 that receives voice commands from the user US via a microphone (not shown) that collects the voice of the user US. In other words, the cooking device 1 itself has the function of selecting recipe data CD by voice input and setting the control conditions.

The control device 40 of the cooking device 1 is basically the same as in the first and second embodiments. That is, the input operation unit 15 includes a central operation unit 15M and left and right operation units 15L and 15R. The central operation unit 15M has touch-type input keys 107 to 109 arranged in a horizontal line outside the central display unit 16 and in a position near the front of it.

The rest of the configuration of the cooking device 1 is the same as that described in the first embodiment, so duplicated explanations will be omitted.

Next, we will explain Figure 54.
In FIG. 54, steps SE1 to SE14 are main operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 and operation steps on the external information processing network (first server 321) and voice input/output unit 1000 side.

As in step SE1, the information emitted from the cooking device 1 is a type of operating state data OS described in embodiments 1 and 2.

The first server 321 is operated by the company (manufacturer) that produced the cooking appliance 1, and has a thorough understanding of the special controls and processes that are unique to the cooking appliance 1, and is therefore able to accurately grasp the operating status of the cooking appliance 1 (including both heating and non-heating operations).

In FIG. 54 , when the start switch (input key) 114 (not shown) is pressed to start cooking in various cooking modes such as the collaborative cooking mode KM1 (step SE1), the operating status data OS is transmitted to the first server 321.
When new operating status data OS arrives, the data recorded in chronological order in storage unit 321R of first server 321 is updated. That is, data on main operations up until the end of cooking is accumulated in chronological order (step SE2).

The operating status data OS includes data indicating the ON/OFF state of the main power switch 20, data indicating the selection process of the combined cooking mode KM1, etc., data on control conditions such as heating temperature and heating time, and the latest temperature measurement data of the top plate 3 and heating chamber 6.

Next, immediately after step SE2, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display section 16M (step SE3).
In the next step SE4, a heating cooking mode is selected. For example, when the input key 107 is touched on the central operation unit 15M to select the combined cooking mode KM1, a first specific screen 16M1 is displayed. When the input key 108 for the combined cooking mode KM2 is touched, a second specific screen 16M2 is displayed showing a default control menu (for example, "warming").

In step SE4, the central operation unit 15M (not shown) determines whether the touch state of the input key 107, which is one of the voice input mode switching keys, is a "long press" or a "short press", and the result of this determination (a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Similarly, when an input key 108L (not shown), which is one of the voice input mode switching keys, is touched in the left operation unit 15L, the left operation unit 15L determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press", and the result of the determination (voice input mode corresponding signal MC1, which is a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Therefore, if the touch operation of the input key 107 of the central operation unit 15M is in a "long press" state, from that point on, the control device 40 changes to "voice input mode 1" (see embodiment 1) (step SE5).

This section describes a case where the voice input mode switching keys 107, 108L (not shown) are touched on two or more different input operation units, for example, the central operation unit 15M and the left operation unit 16L.

As explained in the first embodiment, two cooking modes cannot be selected at the same time. If the input key 108L (not shown) is not touched when the input key 107 is touched, the input process of the coordinated cooking mode KM1 using the central operation unit 15M is started. If the input key 108 (not shown) of the left operation unit 15L is touched during this process, the control device 40 cancels all input processes of the central operation unit 15M. Then, the input process of the left operation unit 15L is started. When the start key 113 is touched on the left operation unit 15L, the input process of the left operation unit 15L is completed, and from this point on, the cooking operation on the left operation unit 15L cannot be canceled unless the stop key 114L (not shown) is pressed.

Therefore, if the input process is completed in the central operation unit 15M after the input key 107 is touched and before the input key 108L (not shown) is touched, the input function of the left operation unit 15L may be disabled at that point ("occupation" as explained in embodiment 1).

In the third embodiment, the following interference prevention operation for the voice input operation is adopted at a stage before the input process at the central operation unit 15M is completed.
That is, from the time when the control device 40 starts the operation of switching to the voice input mode with the input key 107, the control device 40 performs a process of prohibiting input of the input keys 107L, 108R (neither of which is shown) for new cooking in the other input operation units 15L, 15R. Therefore, even if the input keys 107L, 108R are operated, no valid command signal is generated in the control device 40.

As a result, while input is being made in voice input mode at the central operation unit 15M, the voice input mode is not set at the other input operation units 15L and 15R. Therefore, the same voice input is not mistakenly acquired as valid input at the same time at two or more different input operation units.

Next, FIG. 54 will be described.
The communication unit 51 of the control device 40 transmits a voice input mode acceptance start notification SF to the first server 321 .
When the control unit 321C of the first server 321 receives this voice input mode acceptance start notification SF, it enters a voice input mode compatible period (step SE6).

The "voice input mode corresponding period" at step SE6 is one of the features of the third embodiment.
The "voice input mode compatible period" is a period during which a home electric appliance (in this case, the cooking appliance 1) pre-registered in the first server 321 operates to accept input operations in the voice input mode.
When the "voice input mode compatible period" begins, the first server 321 knows that it will receive a voice input signal from the preregistered voice input/output device 1000. Therefore, the first server 321 may perform standby processing in preparation for voice input in a predetermined data format.

The next steps SE6 and SE7 are one of the features of this third embodiment. The first server 321 notifies the voice input/output unit 1000 that the "voice input mode compatible period" has begun (step SE7). This allows the voice input/output unit 1000 to know, albeit indirectly, that the cooking appliance 1 is accepting voice input signals via the first server 321. In other words, the voice input/output unit 1000 can enter a voice input acceptance standby state (preparation mode) without actually checking the state of the cooking appliance 1.

On the other hand, after step SE4, it is also possible to acquire the recipe data CD from the first server 321. A signal permitting acquisition of the recipe data CD is transmitted from the cooking appliance 1 at the time when the input key 107 is touched.
Therefore, an automatic connection operation is performed between the cooking appliance 1 and the first server 321, and if the communication connection is successful, the process proceeds to a mode for acquiring the recipe data CD (step SE4A). Note that in this step SE4A, the latest state data of the cooking appliance 1 may be transmitted to the first server 321 (one type of the operating state data OS).

At step SE5, the control device 40 has been changed to "voice input mode 1", so when the user US speaks a control menu command such as "warm" for the composite cooking mode KM2, as shown in FIG. 54, the voice input/output unit 1000 receives this spoken information (step SE8).

The speech information uttered by the user US to the voice input/output device 1000 is converted into text data in the voice input/output device 1000 and transmitted to the second server 322 in the form of text data of the speech information (voice input signal VS1).

The control unit 322C of the second server 322 receives the text data (voice input signal VS1) via the input/output unit 322A and determines whether it can be converted into a standard command stored in the memory unit 322R.

The control unit 322C converts the text data of the speech information (voice input signal VS1) into various commands prepared as standard commands.

A request B is sent from the input/output unit 322A of the second server 322 to the first server 321. This request B is, for example, a command to change some of the parameters of the control conditions of the recipe data CD (for example, changing the microwave output from 500 W to 600 W). The first server 321 then requests the provision of operation support data GS1 for the user US.

The first server 321 receives the data converted into the standard command by the second server 322 as the request B and determines the request content from the cooking appliance 1. Then, it generates one piece of command information A for the cooking appliance 1 (step SE9).

The command information A is, for example, a notification command to the voice notification unit 50 of the cooking appliance 1. As shown in FIG. 54, for the control menu "warm up", the command information A is, for example, a voice notification such as "Warm up menu accepted. Please set the time". The user US is then recommended to send time setting information for the "warm up" menu. Then, as in step SE8, the control unit waits for more detailed (lower level) condition settings from the user US.

Note that the input process is not necessarily completed with a single voice input from the user US, so steps SE8 and SE9 may be repeated multiple times.

Through the above process, the first server 321 generates a command (command data) for setting the time for the "warm" menu and transmits it to the cooking appliance 1 via the network NW (step SE10). Note that the entire recipe data CD that reflects the control conditions set by the user US may also be transmitted.

The cooking appliance 1 receives information on the "warm" menu, which is one of the recommended cooking menus MB (step SE11).
In this “warm” menu, cooking step 1 is carried out in heating chamber 6 .

Therefore, it is necessary to perform the operations of opening the door 7, placing the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6, and then closing the door 7. The opening and closing of the door 7 is controlled by the opening and closing detection unit 10 (steps SE12 and SE13).
In the "warm" control menu, the heating operation does not start automatically when the door 7 is closed, but goes into a standby state waiting for a command to start heating. The voice notification 50 may, for example, say, "Auto microwave operation accepted. Press the start key to start heating," and prompt the user to input a command to start heating (step SE14).

In the third embodiment, the cooking appliance 1 itself has a function of directly processing voice input, so that the voice input/output unit 1000 is not required.
For example, from step SE5 onwards, the user US may simply speak towards the voice signal receiving unit 56.

The cooking device 1 of the third embodiment has the following configuration in summary.
That is, the heating device has a first heating means HM1 which inductively heats the object to be heated N on the top plate 3, a heating chamber 6, a microwave heating source (second heating means) HM2 which supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 6, an oven heating source (third heating means) HM3 which heats the heating chamber 6 with radiant heat, a steam generator (fourth heating means) HM4 which supplies high-temperature steam to the inside of the heating chamber 6, an input operation unit 15 (15M, 15L, 15R), an alarm unit 90 which has a display unit 16 (16M, 16L, 16R) and an audio alarm unit 50, a communication unit 51 which wirelessly exchanges information with the outside, and a control device 40.

,
The control device 40 is
After the standby initial screen 16M1 is displayed on the three display sections (16M, 16L, 16R) of the display section 16,
(1) IH only mode in which the first heating means is operated alone; (2) Range only cooking mode in which the second heating means is operated alone; (3) Oven only cooking mode in which the third heating means is operated alone; (4) Steam only cooking mode in which the fourth heating means is operated alone; (5) Composite cooking mode KM2 in which the second heating means and one or both of the third and fourth heating means are operated simultaneously for heating or are automatically operated at different times to perform heating and cooking in the heating chamber 6;
(5) An integrated cooking mode KM1 in which the second heating means, both or either one of the third and fourth heating means, and the first heating means are operated sequentially after a transition period TR whose length is determined by a command from a user;
and having an operating program capable of executing
The integrated cooking mode KM1 includes a cooking process 1 performed before the transition period TR using the heating chamber 6, and a cooking process 2 performed above the top plate 15 after the transition period TR,
The control device 40 has a function of receiving recipe data CD for performing cooking from a first server 321 and transmitting operating state data OS to the first server 321 wirelessly (via a network NW);
The control device 40 is configured to acquire the recipe data CD, and set control conditions for the cooking menu to which the recipe data CD is applied upon receiving command information (commands) from the first server 321 .

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 was configured to automatically switch to voice input mode depending on the touch state of a specific input key (e.g., 107) on the input operation unit 15.

Summary of embodiment 3.
As described above, in the third embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is as follows:
A main body 2 and
A heating chamber 6 formed inside the main body 2;
A first heating means HM1 for heating an object N placed on an upper surface of the main body 2;
A second heating means HM2 for cooking in the heating chamber 6;
A third heating means HM2 for cooking food by radiant heat in the heating chamber 6;
A fourth heating means HM2 for cooking with steam in the heating chamber 6;
an input operation unit 15 for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means HM1 to the fourth heating means HM4;
A notification means 90;
a control device 40 that receives commands from the input operation unit 15;
The input operation unit 15 includes first selection means (input keys) 107, 108, 109 (arranged on the common operation unit 15M) for selecting one from a plurality of cooking modes (linked, combined, independent) KM1 to KM3 using the first heating means HM1 to the fourth heating means HM4, and second selection means (dial-type selection means) 123 for selecting one cooking menu or control menu from the cooking modes selected by the first selection means,
The first selection means 107, 108, 109 are touch-type input keys (provided for each of the cooking modes),
The second selection means 123 is a dial-type selection means,
The first selection means 107, 108, 109 issues a voice input mode setting signal MC1 when the length of the operation time is equal to or longer than a threshold value.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

Because of this configuration, the touch-type input keys 107, 108, and 109 on the input operation unit can be used to switch to voice input mode, so that the tedious input process before starting the heating operation can be input by voice. This improves operability for the user US and reduces the workload.

Furthermore, by rotating the dial-type selection means 123, cooking menus and control menus can be easily selected, improving the operability of preparation work before starting cooking.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, by operating the touch-type input keys (107, 108, 109) that can instruct switching to the voice input mode, after the cooking mode or the control menu is selected, acquisition of recipe data CD from outside is permitted.

With this configuration, the timing for acquiring various recipe data CD from outside can be controlled by the input operation unit 15.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 3, the heat cooking system according to the fourth disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one embodiment of the heating and cooking system according to the fourth disclosure is as follows:
A cooking device 1 for heating an object to be heated N;
A cloud server 300 (a first server 321, a second server 322, etc.) and an audio input/output unit 1000 connected to the cooking appliance 1 via a network NW by wireless communication;
Equipped with
The cloud server 300 has a function of transmitting recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1,
The cooking device 1 has a function of switching between a touch input mode and a voice input mode according to a touch state of a touch input key, and a function of selecting at least one of a cooking menu, a control menu, and a control condition by a dial-type selection means for each cooking mode selected in the touch input mode,
The cooking appliance 1 is in a standby state for acquiring the recipe data CD while being switched to the voice input mode,
When the cloud server 300 receives a request for providing recipe data CD via the voice input/output unit 1000, the cloud server 300 transmits the recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1,
The cooking appliance 1 inputs control conditions related to the acquired recipe data CD in the voice input mode.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

According to the cooking system of the fourth disclosure, cooking can be performed using recipe data CD acquired from outside via a network.
In addition, when recipe data is acquired, the mode is automatically changed to voice input mode, so that when inputting control conditions related to the subsequently acquired recipe data, it is possible to input by voice, which contributes to improving the efficiency of input operations for the user US and reducing the input burden.

Furthermore, by rotating the dial-type selection means 123, at least one of the cooking menu, control menu, and control conditions can be easily selected, improving the operability of preparation work before starting cooking.

Furthermore, the cooking mode and control conditions to be executed by the cooking appliance 1 can be transmitted to the cloud server (first server 321) 300 via the voice input/output device 1000, and an instruction can be given to provide the desired recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1, which can contribute to improving the efficiency of input operations of the user US and reducing the input load.

Furthermore, in the cooking system of the fourth disclosure, the communication terminal 200 can obtain the latest inventory data SD1 by requesting the cloud server (first server 321) 300 to provide the inventory data SD1. Also, as described in the first embodiment, the inventory data SD1 can be obtained by an information processing device 411 (not shown) called a home gateway or the like.
Therefore, the user US can easily know the inventory status of the refrigerator 403, check the ingredients in the refrigerator 403 in advance, and select an appropriate cooking menu.

Further, one aspect of the fourth disclosed heating and cooking system disclosed in the third embodiment is as follows:
A configuration was provided in which the cooking appliance 1 transmits a voice input mode reception start notification SF (see FIG. 54) to the outside (first server 321) to indicate that the voice input mode has been selected.

Therefore, the first server 321 that has received the voice input mode reception start notification SF can set a "voice input mode support period." Then, the first server 321 can prepare (standby process) for receiving a voice input signal from the voice input/output device 1000.

Furthermore, by the audio input/output device 1000 acquiring the information of the audio input mode reception start notification SF, it becomes clear that the cooking appliance 1 is accepting an audio input signal. This allows the audio input/output device 1000 to enter a standby state for receiving audio input (preparation mode) without actually checking the state of the cooking appliance 1, which is expected to shorten the time required for the input process in cooking.

Embodiment 4.
55 to 63 show the fourth embodiment according to the present disclosure. FIG. 55 is a plan view showing an enlarged central display section and central operation section of the cooking device 1. FIG. 56 is a plan view showing an enlarged right display section and right operation section of the cooking device 1. FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the control device and the input operation section (central operation section) of the cooking device shown in FIG. 56. FIG. 58 is a flowchart 1 showing the input process of the left and right operation sections after the main power is turned on in the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 55. FIG. 59 is a flowchart 1 showing the input process of the central operation section after the main power is turned on in the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 55. FIG. 60 is a time chart 1 showing the input process of the central operation section after the main power is turned on in the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 55. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the central display section and the central operation section before acquiring recipe data from the outside and transitioning to the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking device shown in FIG. 55. Fig. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the central operation unit and the central display unit when recipe data of the cooperative cooking mode is acquired in the cooking device shown in Fig. 55. Fig. 63 is a time chart explaining the interference prevention measures of the voice input mode when cooking is performed simultaneously in the central operation unit and the left operation unit. Note that the same reference numerals are used to denote the same or corresponding parts as those in the configurations of the respective embodiments explained in Figs. 1 to 54.

Next, we will explain Figure 55.
55 is an enlarged plan view of the central display section and central operation section of the cooking appliance 1. This is the stage before the main power switch 20 (not shown) is turned on.
The cooking device 1 of the fourth embodiment has, as the operation units 15, a central operation unit 15M, a right operation unit 15R, and a left operation unit 15L.

In FIG. 55, an input key 180 for selecting a voice input mode is arranged on the central operation unit 15M. This input key 180 may be a mechanical switch, or may be a touch-type input switch input key like input keys 153M to 159M described later.

When the input key 180 for selecting the voice input is pressed once, the next input can be made by voice.
When this input key 180 is pressed, the state is switched to "voice input mode 2."
However, after pressing this input key 180, it is not possible to select the heating means (first heating means HM1) by voice. In addition, once the input key 180 is pressed, the "voice input mode 2" cannot be cancelled until the start switch 113 is pressed to start the cooking operation. When the cooking operation is started, the voice input mode 2 setting is automatically cancelled at that point.

Therefore, the input key 180 must be operated immediately after touching ("short pressing") the input key 153M to select cooking in the heating chamber 6 or cooking in the central heating port 4C. In other words, if the input key 153M is "long pressed," it can be switched to voice input mode 2, but if it is "short pressed" instead of "long pressed," pressing the input key 180 afterwards can switch to voice input mode 2 from that point on.

As described in the first embodiment, the input keys 180 in the fourth embodiment have two types: one in which the input functions of (some of) the input keys (e.g., 154M7, 156M, etc.) other than the dedicated voice input key 180 are temporarily disabled after the selection of "voice input mode 2" (this control pattern is referred to as "voice input mode 2A"), and the other in which the input functions are not disabled (this control pattern is referred to as "voice input mode 2B").
Either of these corresponds to the "voice input mode 2" referred to here. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the case of the "voice input mode 2A" will be described as a premise.

The central operation unit 15M is used to input operations mainly related to cooking in the heating chamber 6 and cooking using the central heating port 4C.
As shown in FIG. 55, the central operation unit 15M includes nine input keys 113, 114, 153M, 154M, 155M, 156M, 157M, 158M, and 159M, and the input key 180.

The nine input keys 113, 114, 153M, 154M, 155M, 156M, 157M, 158M, and 159M are capacitive touch keys that generate an input command signal each time they are touched.

21M is an individual light-emitting unit arranged near the input keys 113, 114, 153M, 154M, 155M, 156M, 157M, 158M, and 159M. It emits light to indicate that the input function of the corresponding input key is active. In other words, it corresponds to the individual light-emitting units 21M1 to 21M5 described in the first embodiment.

21V is a display that indicates that the device is in voice input mode, and is illuminated from below by a light-emitting element such as a light-emitting diode.

In this fourth embodiment, the specific input keys (153M, 154M) for selecting the cooking mode have the function of detecting a "long press" as described in the first embodiment and switching to the aforementioned "voice input mode 1."

The individual light emitting section 21M is composed of an LED, and emits light in response to the operation of the input keys 113, 114, 153M to 159M. In other words, when the input function is valid, the corresponding light emitting section 21M continues to emit light.
The two adjacent input keys 155M and 154M have in common the function of changing the display content of the first area 22, and therefore share one light emitting section 21M.

The two adjacent input keys 157M and 156M share one light-emitting section 21M since they have a common function of changing the display content of the second area 23.
The two adjacent input keys 159M and 158M share the same function of changing the display content of the third area 24, and therefore share one light-emitting section 21M.

The start key 113 is an input key that is pressed (touched) to start cooking, and the stop key 114 is an input key that is pressed (touched) to pause or end cooking. In addition, the cooking process of the linked cooking mode KM1 can be canceled midway.

The input key 153M is an input key that selects the collaborative cooking mode KM1 when operated after the main power switch 20 is turned ON.

When input keys 154M and 155M are operated after the main power switch 20 is turned ON (without pressing input key 153M), they are used to select the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode 3.

The four input keys 156M to 159M have the function of allowing the user US to adjust (within a certain range) control conditions such as microwave output and cooking time.

The two input keys 153M and 154M are also called "voice input switching keys" that can switch the default setting of "touch input mode" to the "voice input mode 1". However, these two input keys only function as "voice input switching keys" when the touch operation is a "long press".

When any one of the single cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the linked cooking mode KM1 is selected, the selection result is displayed on the central display portion 16M.
Furthermore, when the central operation unit 15M or the left and right operation units 15L and 15R are switched to the voice input mode, all of the display units 16 display in text that the mode is the voice input mode.
For example, in the central display section 16M, a specific mark is displayed in the first specific screen 16M1 to the third specific screen 16M3 (see the mark 179A in FIG. 27 and FIG. 37).

As shown in FIG. 55, the input keys 154M and 155M are located adjacent to the first area 22 of the central display unit 16M, near the front of it, and are keys for switching the display content of the screen displayed in the first area 22 of the central display unit 16M.
Reference numeral 123 denotes a dial-type selection means, which can select the control menu of the coordinated cooking menu or the composite cooking mode KM2 in the same manner as the dial-type selection means described in the first embodiment. In addition, the control conditions such as heat and heating temperature can also be selected.

In this fourth embodiment, the dial-type selection means 123 provided in the central operation unit 15M can also be used to start the voice input mode at any time during the input process of the central operation unit 15M. This is one of the major features of the fourth embodiment.

The selection means 123 can rotate the knob (dial) both clockwise and counterclockwise around the rotation center point CP, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 55. It can also be rotated one or more times, but the rotation range may be limited to a certain range. The selection means 123 is rotatably fixed to the central operation unit 15M by a rotation shaft 123A (not shown) at the center point CP.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 4, the selection means 123 is movable within a certain range (about several mm) in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 123A at the rotation center point CP. In other words, it is possible to push it in.
A biasing means (not shown) such as a compression spring arranged to surround the rotating shaft 123A (not shown) ensures that the shaft always automatically returns to its original position when the shaft is no longer pressed in. The rotating shaft 123A is not limited to a linear shaft located at the rotation center point CP, but may be a concentric hollow cylinder centered on the rotation center point CP.

Switching devices in which a dial portion like this rotates to change the heat level, etc., while moving in a direction along the rotation axis to open and close a switch, etc., have been proposed in the field of cooking appliances in JP 2005-69561 A and JP 3810901 A, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

The selection means 123 can change the cooking menu, control menu, control conditions, etc. displayed in the first area 22 to the third area 24 one step at a time by rotating the dial portion (knob portion). For example, to change the cooking menu or control menu displayed in the first area 22, one can touch one of the corresponding input keys 154M, 155M and then rotate the dial portion (knob portion) of the selection means 123.

Meanwhile, the selection means 123 can move in a direction along the rotation axis 123A (not shown), so it can be pushed in a certain range even while rotating. When pushed in a direction along the rotation axis 123A (not shown), the rotation axis presses the operating part of the voice input switch 123S (not shown). In other words, when the selection means 123 is pushed in a direction along the rotation axis 123A (not shown), it turns on the voice input switch 123S (not shown).

When the voice input switch 123S (not shown) is turned ON, a voice input mode setting signal MC is sent from the central operation unit 15M to the control device 40, similar to the "input mode switching command MC1" (voice input mode setting signal MC1) described in embodiment 1. Details will be described in FIG. 57.

As described above, when the selection means 123 is pressed in a direction along the rotation shaft 123A (not shown), it emits a voice input mode setting signal MC1 and can switch to the voice input mode. Therefore, the voice input mode can be set at any time while selecting a cooking menu or control menu in the first area 22, or while viewing the default control conditions (heat, set temperature, etc.) displayed in the second area 23.

As with the voice input setting by the input key 53M ("long press" operation), once the voice input setting by the selection means 123 is set, the user US cannot cancel it at any time thereafter.
When the start key 113 is pressed to start cooking, the mode is automatically released and the normal touch input mode is restored.

Next, we will explain Figure 56.
FIG. 56 is an enlarged plan view of the right display unit 16R and the right operation unit 15R of the cooking appliance 1. FIG.
56, an input key 153R having a function of selecting a voice input mode is arranged on the right operation section 15R. This input key 153R is a touch-type input switch, like six input keys 113R, 114R, 156R, 157R, 190R, and 191R described later.

When the input key 153R is pressed for the first time after the main power is turned on, an associated cooking mode KM1 in which the right heating port 4R is used in cooking step 1 can be selected.
When the input key 153 is pressed and held, the right operation unit 15R issues a signal to the control device 40 to switch to the "voice input mode 2" state.
However, once the input key 153R is pressed, the "voice input mode 1" cannot be cancelled until the start switch 113R is pressed to start the cooking operation. When the cooking operation starts, the voice input mode 1 is automatically cancelled.

That is, as described in the first embodiment, the input key 153R in the fourth embodiment employs a case where, after the selection of "voice input mode 1", the input functions of (some of) the input keys (190R, 191R, 156R, 157R) other than the input key 153R are temporarily disabled (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 1A"). To change the state of this "voice input mode 1A" to "voice input mode 1B", it is necessary to operate the function setting input key 115 of the central operation unit 15M.
In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the explanation will be given on the premise that the "voice input mode 1A" is used.

The right operation unit 15R is used to input operations related to cooking using the right heating port 4R. It is possible to set cooking to a coordinated cooking mode KM1, in which the right heating port 4R is used as cooking step 1, and a standalone cooking mode KM3, in which induction heating cooking is performed using the right heating port 4R.

Although not shown, the left operation unit 16L also has input keys corresponding to the various input keys 113R, 114R, 153R, 154R, 155R, 156R, and 157R shown in FIG. 56. The left operation unit 16L also has a selection means 123L (not shown) corresponding to the dial-type selection means 123R.

21R is an individual light emitting unit arranged near the input keys 113R, 114R, 154R, 155R, 156R, and 157R. It emits light to indicate that the input function of the corresponding input key is active. In other words, it corresponds to the individual light emitting unit 21M described in FIG. 55.

21VR is a display that indicates that the mode is voice input mode, and is illuminated from below by a light-emitting element such as a light-emitting diode. This display 21VR lights up when the voice input mode is set by the input key 153R, and when the voice input mode is set by the dial selection means 123R. This is one of the features of the fourth embodiment.

In this embodiment 4, the right operation unit 15R has a function of detecting a "long press" of a specific input key (153R) for selecting a cooking mode as described in embodiment 1, and switching to the "voice input mode 1" described above.

The right display section 16R has two display areas, a first area 22 and a second area 23, and the sizes of the first area 22 and the second area 23 change depending on the scene. In addition, the initial standby screen 16MH displays both the first area 22 and the second area 23 integrated together.

Each of the input keys 190R and 191R is provided with a light emitting portion 221R.
The two adjacent input keys 157R and 156R have in common the function of changing the display content of the second area 23, and therefore share one light-emitting section 21R.

113R is a start key that is pressed (touched) to start cooking, and 114R is a cancel stop key that is pressed (touched) to pause or end cooking.

The input key 153R is an input key that selects the linked cooking mode KM1 that can be started with the right operation unit 15R when it is touched (either by a "short press" or "long press") before the input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M and the input key 153L (not shown) of the left operation unit 15L after the main power switch 20 is turned on.

The input key 190R is an input key that allows the selection of the coordinated cooking mode 1 when it is touched after the input key 153 is touched.
The input key 191R is an input key that, when touched after the input key 153 is touched, can select the single cooking mode 3 using the induction heating source.

For example, if the coordinated cooking menu initially displayed in the first area 22 is "Hamburger", then touching the input key 190R once again will change it to the next option, "Roast Beef" (see FIG. 31).
In other words, the identification information 167 of "Hamburger" of one of the coordinated cooking menus displayed in the first area 22 moves backward. At the same time, the identification information 169 of "Roast Beef" displayed in the front is displayed in the center of the first area 22 in the front-to-rear direction.

On the other hand, if input key 191R is pressed after input key 153R, and the single control menu initially displayed in first area 22 (by default) was "Keep Warm," touching input key 191R once again will change it to the next option, "Stew." Furthermore, touching input key 191R once will change it to the control menu for "Boil Water." In this way, identification information 160, 167 of the cooking menu or control menu to be executed is displayed in the center of the front-to-back direction of first area 22. At the moment start switch 113R is pressed, the cooking menu or control menu whose identification information is displayed in the center of the front-to-back direction of first area 22 is executed.

The two input keys 156R and 157R are used to select the control conditions to be displayed in the second area in each of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 and the independent cooking mode KM1.
For example, the control condition changes by one step each time the input keys 156R and 157R are touched. For example, the default heat level initially displayed in the second area 23 is increased by one step each time the right input key 156R is pressed.
Conversely, the left input key 157R can be used to decrease the value by one step.

When either the single cooking mode KM3 or the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected by the right operation unit 15R, the selection result is displayed on the right display unit 16R. In this case, the single cooking mode KM3 is displayed on the third specific screen 16R3. In addition, in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is displayed on the first specific screen 16R1. Figure 56 is an example of the third specific screen 16R3.

280 is identification information indicating the "stewing" menu, which is one of the control menus of the single cooking mode KM3. 281 is a control condition display section. In FIG. 56, the heating time is displayed as 30 minutes.

A dial-type selection means 123R can select a cooking menu of the collaborative cooking menu KM1 or a control menu of the independent cooking mode KM1 in the same manner as the dial-type selection means 123 described in the first embodiment. In addition, control conditions such as heat and heating temperature can also be selected.
As with the dial-type selection means 123 of the central operation unit 15M, by pressing the dial-type selection means 123R in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 123A (not shown), an "input mode switching command MC1" (voice input mode setting signal MC1) is sent from the right operation unit 15R to the control device 40. The voice input mode sent by the dial-type selection means 123 may be called "voice input mode 3." This is to distinguish, for the sake of explanation, from "voice input mode 1" by the input keys 107 etc. and "voice input mode 2" by the input keys 140.

As is clear from the above description, in this embodiment 4, the voice input mode (voice input mode 3) can be started at any timing in the input process of the right operation unit 15R by the selection means 123R arranged in the right operation unit 15R. This is one of the major features of the embodiment 4.
The configuration of the left operating section 15L is the same as that of the right operating section 15R.

Next, we will explain Figure 57.
Figure 57 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the control device 40 and central operation unit 15M of the heating cooker 1 shown in Figure 55. The configuration shown in Figure 57 is basically the same as the configuration described in Figure 9 of embodiment 1, but the major difference is the dial operation detection unit 15H.

Dial operation detection unit 15H corresponds to dial rotation detection unit 15G in the first embodiment, but differs as follows.
The dial rotation detection unit 15G was configured to detect a pulse signal generated in response to the rotation of the dial-type selection means 123, convert it into a command signal corresponding to the angle of rotation, and input the command signal to the input key identification unit 15A. Note that the dial-type selection means 123 rotates both clockwise and counterclockwise, and the rotation direction was also determined.

In response to this, in addition to the functions of the dial rotation detection unit 15G, the dial operation detection unit 15H also detects whether the dial portion (knob portion) has been moved in the direction of the rotation axis 123A (not shown), and if it has moved a certain amount or more, the voice input switch 123S (not shown) turns ON, and this ON signal is input to the input mode determination unit 15C. Therefore, the input mode determination unit 15C receives a signal from the voice input switch 123S and determines that a command for the voice input mode has been received.

In this way, the input mode determination unit 15C can transmit a signal (voice input mode corresponding signal MC1) indicating the determination result of whether or not the mode is "voice input mode 3" to the control device 40. The configurations of the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L are basically the same as the configuration of the central operation unit 15M shown in FIG. 57.

Next, we will explain Figure 58.
FIG. 58 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process of the right operating unit 15R after the main power is turned on in the cooking appliance 1 shown in FIG.
The operation program for the right operation unit 15R is stored in a memory unit 15DR (not shown) of a microcomputer (not shown) provided exclusively for the right operation unit 15R. The memory unit 15DR is similar to the memory unit 15D shown in Fig. 57. The operation program for the left operation unit 15L is also stored in a memory unit 15DL (not shown) of a microcomputer (not shown) provided exclusively for the left operation unit 15R.

In FIG. 58, steps S100 to S112 correspond to the operation program stored in the storage unit 15DR.
In FIG. 58, the numbers in white indicate the corresponding input keys in the right operation unit 15R, and the dial-type selection means 123R is omitted.

When the main power switch 20 is turned on, the right display section 16R, the left display section 16L and the central display section 16M each display the standby initial screen 16MH (step S100).
Next, when the input key 153R is touched while the standby initial screen 16MH is being displayed, this selects the right operation section 15R.

Next, when the input key 191 is touched (step S101), the single cooking mode KM3 is selected. Therefore, the display unit 16R switches from the standby initial screen 16RH to the third specific screen 16R3 (step S102).

Step S103 shows a process of acquiring recipe data CD from an external communication terminal 200, cloud server 300, etc. In this way, acquiring recipe data CD is not essential.

At least one control menu is displayed on the third specific screen 16R3, for example, as described in FIG. 56, but each time the input key 191R is touched once more, another control menu can be displayed in the first area 22 (step S104).
When the desired control menu is displayed in the first area 22, the control conditions are displayed in the second area 23 as default settings. In order to change the control conditions, the input key 156R or 157R may be touched (step S105).

If the combination of the control menu and the control conditions is acceptable, the start switch 113R is finally pressed (step S106), thereby starting cooking in the single cooking mode KM3.
On the other hand, if the input key 191 is not touched in step S101 and the input key 190R is touched (step S107), the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected, and the display unit 16R switches from the standby initial screen 16RH to the first specific screen 16R1 (step S108).

Step S109 shows a process of acquiring specific recipe data CD in the field of collaborative cooking mode KM1 from an external communication terminal 200, cloud server 300, etc. In this way, acquiring recipe data CD is not essential.

On the first specific screen 16R1, at least one linked cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") is displayed in the first area 22, and each time the input key 190R is touched once more, another linked cooking menu can be displayed in the first area 22 (step S110).
When the desired integrated cooking menu is displayed in the first area 22, the control conditions are displayed in the second area 23 as default settings. To change the control conditions, the user simply touches the input key 156R or 157R (step S111).

If the combination of linked cooking menu and control conditions is acceptable, finally press the start switch 113R (step S112). This starts heating and cooking in linked cooking mode KM1.

As can be seen from the dashed frame in FIG. 58, when the input key 153R is first pressed and held, the period from step S101 to pressing the start key 113R can be input by voice in the voice input mode.

Next, we will explain Figure 59.
FIG. 59 is a flowchart 1 showing the input process of the central operation unit after the main power is turned on in the cooking appliance 1 shown in FIG.
The operation program of the central operation unit 15M is stored in the memory unit 15D shown in FIG.

In FIG. 59, steps SM10 to SM19 correspond to the operation program stored in the storage unit 15D shown in FIG.
In FIG. 59, the numbers in white indicate the corresponding input keys in the central operation unit 15M, and the dial-type selection means 123 is not shown.

When the main power switch 20 is turned on, the right display section 16R, the left display section 16L, and the central display section 16M each display the standby initial screen 16MH (step S10). Then, the notification section 90 also provides a guide to prompt the user US to perform an input operation.
Next, after determining that there is no abnormality, the control device 40 enables the input function of the central operation unit 15M (also enables the input function of the left and right operation units 15L, 15R).
Also, the operation of measuring the elapsed time starts (step SM11).

When the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed, touching the input key 153M (either a short press or a long press) selects the collaborative cooking mode KM1 (step SM12). As a result, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (step SM13).

At least three linked cooking menus (e.g., "hamburger steak") are displayed in the first area 22 of the first specific screen 16M1, but each time the input key 154M or 155M is touched once more, another linked cooking menu can be displayed in the first area 22 (step SM14).

When the desired collaborative cooking menu is displayed in the first area 22, the control conditions are displayed in the second area 23 with default settings. To change the control conditions, the input keys 156M to 159M can be touched. Then, by pressing the start switch 113, heating and cooking in the collaborative cooking mode KM1 begins.

On the other hand, if the input key 154 is touched (either a short press or a long press) without touching the input key 153M at the stage of step SM12 where the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed, the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM1 that use the heating chamber 6 are selected (step SM15). As a result, a shared screen of the second specific screen 16M2 and the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed (step SM16).

The shared screen of the second specific screen 16M2 and the third specific screen 16M3 displays a plurality of control menus that can be executed in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM1. For example, as in the first embodiment (see Figs. 6 and 11), three pieces of identification information 160 to 162 are displayed.

In the next step SM17, the user operates input keys 154M and 155M to select the desired control menu in the center of the front-to-rear direction of first area 22, thereby selecting a control menu for the combined cooking mode. Then, second specific screen 16M2 is displayed (step SM18).

On the other hand, if the control menu for the combined cooking mode KM2 is not selected in step SM17, the single cooking mode KM3 is selected, and the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed (step SM19).

Also, in step SM15 shown in FIG. 59, if there is no touch operation even on the input key 154, the determination becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM20. In this step SM20, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 57) determines whether or not a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SM12.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SM20 that the preset time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM21, where the process of automatically shutting off the main power supply (the same as "automatic shutoff process 1" described in embodiment 1) is performed. Then, the series of operations ends. In this way, if neither input key 153M nor 154M is operated for a certain period of time, when the time limit TX (e.g., 30 minutes) has elapsed since the time the input function was enabled (step SM11), the main power switch 20 is automatically opened.

When either input key 153M or 154M is pressed and held in step SM12 or SM15, the mode can be switched to voice input mode from that point on, so the touch input operation shown in FIG. 59 can be largely omitted.

Note that steps SM18 and SM19 onwards include steps for setting control conditions, but these are not shown. These control conditions can be set using input keys 156M to 159M.

Next, we will explain Figure 60.
Fig. 60 is a time chart 1 showing the input process of the central operation unit 15M after the main power is turned on in the cooking appliance 1 shown in Fig. 55. In Fig. 60, numbers enclosed in square frames indicate the corresponding input keys.

FIG. 60 shows input keys to be operated in the categories of "cooperative cooking menu selection stage,""control condition selection stage," and "heat cooking stage" along the horizontal axis with time passing.
As shown in FIG. 60, the time length of the voice input mode is shown for two cases, ie, when the input key 153M is "short-pressed" and when it is "long-pressed."

(1) When the input key 153M is "short pressed", the input keys 154M and 155M are operated in the "cooperative cooking menu selection stage".
In this case, when the dial type selection means 123 is rotated and then moved in the axial direction,
Alternatively, by moving the switch in the axial direction without rotating the switch, the voice input mode B can be set.
In the "control condition selection stage", input keys 156M and 157M are operated (in some cases, input keys 158M and 159M are also operated).
Even at this stage, voice input mode C can be set by rotating dial type selection means 123 and then moving it axially, or by moving it axially without rotating it.
In the "cooking stage", by operating start key 113, the operation can be shifted to cooking.
The voice input mode B and the voice input mode C are terminated when the start key 113 is operated.
(2) When the input key 153M is "long pressed", the voice input mode A can be set from the stage where the input key 153M is "long pressed" in the "linked cooking menu selection stage". The heating cooking operation can be started by operating the start key 113. The voice input mode A ends when the start key 113 is operated.

The voice input mode A and the voice input mode B shown in FIG. 60 are distinguished for the purpose of explaining FIG. 60, but are essentially the same.
The voice input mode C has a narrower range of input than the voice input modes A and B in that only the control conditions can be input by voice.

Next, we will explain Figure 61.
FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of central display unit 16M and central operation unit 15M in the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 55 before acquiring recipe data from outside and transitioning to the collaborative cooking mode.

FIG. 61 shows a scene where "hamburger steak" is to be started on the cooking menu of the collaborative cooking mode using the central operating unit 15M.
In the stage of FIG. 61, the external recipe identification section 173 displays that cooking data for hamburger steak has been acquired from outside as recipe data CD.

In the state shown in FIG. 61, the input keys 154M and 155M do not have the function of changing the collaborative cooking menu to anything other than "Hamburger". In FIG. 61, the input functions of both input keys 154M and 155M are disabled, as can be seen from the fact that no star-shaped mark is attached to the individual light-emitting units 21M1 corresponding to the input keys 154M and 155M.

In the scene in FIG. 61, the only keys with valid input functions are the input keys 156, 157 and the start key 113. When voice input mode 1 is selected, the input functions of the input keys 156, 157 are also disabled, and control conditions are input by voice input.

Next, we will explain Figure 62.
FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the central operation unit 15M and the central display unit 16M when the recipe data CD of the collaborative cooking mode KM1 is acquired in the cooking appliance shown in FIG.

There are two types of auxiliary information 179 shown in FIG. 62. One is voice input mode display information 179D, which indicates that voice input mode is selected and voice input is accepted. The other is reference information 179E, which recommends input of control conditions and includes examples (standard values) of control conditions that can be input.

173 is an external recipe identification section that indicates that the cooking menu is based on recipe data CD obtained via the network NW or via the communication terminal 200. This makes it easy to see that the linked cooking menu currently displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 was obtained from an external source.

In the state shown in FIG. 62, the input keys 153M to 159 do not have a touch input function. This is clear from the fact that the corresponding individual light-emitting units 21M1 are not marked with star marks.

Next, we will explain Figure 63.
Fig. 63 is a time chart for explaining the interference prevention measures in the voice input mode when cooking is performed simultaneously in the central operation unit 15M and the right operation unit 15R. The left operation unit 15L also adopts the same control as the interference prevention measures shown in Fig. 63.

Fig. 63 is a diagram corresponding to Fig. 42 of the first embodiment. In Fig. 63 as well as in Fig. 42, the number "107" indicates the input key 107 of the central operation unit 15M, "113" indicates the start key 113, and "123" indicates the dial type selection means 123.
"153R" is an input key of the right operation unit 15R corresponding to the input key 107 of the central operation unit 15M (see FIG. 56). "113R" and "114R" also indicate the start key and the stop key, respectively, of the right operation unit 15R.

As shown in FIG. 63, when the input key 107 is "short pressed" on the central operation unit 15M, the input key 107 is followed by pressing the dial type selection means 123 and then pressing the start key 1113, and the heating and cooking operation (cooking process) is started.
On the other hand, if the initial touch operation of the input key 107 is a "long press", the mode is switched to the voice input mode, and the heating cooking operation (cooking process) is started by pressing the start key 113.

When the input process for one cooking session is completed and cooking is started, the voice input mode is automatically released (the voice input mode ends and the mode automatically returns to the touch input mode, which is the default setting).
Therefore, during the cooking process, it is not possible to stop or restart cooking by voice input, or to control conditions such as heat level by voice input.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the fourth embodiment, the control device 40 is configured not to simultaneously accept a command to start the voice input mode related to the central operation unit (15M) and a command to start the voice input mode related to the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L. This is shown in Fig. 63 as a schematic diagram.
The heat cooking selection (selection of the single cooking mode KM2) and the voice input mode switching (start) command on the right operation unit 15R must be performed using the input key 153R (see FIG. 56).

This FIG. 63 is slightly different from the configuration explained in FIG. 42 of the first embodiment, and the following explanation will focus on this difference.
When the input key 107 of the central operation unit 15M is pressed and held to start the voice input mode, if the right operation unit 15R is not in the above-mentioned "occupied" state, the input function of the input keys 153R, 190R, 191R (see FIG. 56) of the right operation unit 15R is valid.
Therefore, when the input key 153R of the right operation unit 15R is pressed and held, the cooking of the right heating port 4R can be selected, but the voice input mode cannot be set even if the input key 153R is pressed and held. This is a major difference from the configuration in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 63 with the input key 153R enclosed in a dashed line, the voice input mode setting signal MC1 is not sent from the right operation unit 15R. In other words, the control device 40 refuses to accept the command signal for the voice input mode. Therefore, even if the key is "pressed and held," the mode does not switch to voice input mode. However, since the touch operation of the input key 153R is input to the control device 40, input in the normal "touch input mode" is permitted. The right display unit 16R may notify the user of this "conditional acceptance" of the touch input mode. After this, the start key 113R can be pressed to start the cooking operation.

Therefore, if the central operation unit 15M is in voice input mode and cooking has not yet started, the right operation unit 15R cannot be set to voice input mode, and therefore the voice signal issued by the user US (for the central operation unit 15M) is not received by the voice signal receiving unit 56R (not shown) of the right operation unit 15R as an input command for the right operation unit 15R.

As shown in FIG. 63, after the "voice input mode" of the central operation unit 15M is ended by operating the start key 113, the input key 191H has already been pressed on the right operation unit 15R, and the control menu has been selected and the input process of the control conditions has been started by the input keys 156R and 157R, so the touch input mode does not automatically return to the voice input mode midway through. If you wish to change to the voice input mode midway through, you need to press the dial selection means 123R once in the axial direction to switch to the voice input mode (voice input mode 3).

In FIG. 63, measures to prevent interference in the voice input mode between the central operation unit 15M and the right operation unit 15R are described, but similar measures are also implemented between the central operation unit 15M and the left operation unit 15L. Measures to prevent interference in the voice input mode are also implemented between the left operation unit 15L and the right operation unit 15R. For example, this is the case when cooking is performed simultaneously in the single cooking mode KM3 in the left operation unit 15L and the right operation unit 15R.

Summary of embodiment 4.
As is clear from the above description, in this fourth embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the fifth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device according to the fifth disclosure is as follows:
A main body 2 and
A heating chamber 6 formed inside the main body 2;
A first heating means HM1 for heating an object N placed on an upper surface of the main body 2;
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heat sources for cooking in the heating chamber 6;
an input operation unit 15 for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
A notification means 90;
a control device 40 that receives commands from the input operation unit 15;
The input operation unit 15 has, as touch input means, a first selection means (input keys 153M, 154M, 153R, 153L) for selecting one from a plurality of cooking modes using the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, a second selection means (154M, 155M, 190R, 190L) for selecting one cooking menu or control menu from the cooking modes selected by the first selection means, and a third selection means (156M, 157M, 156R, 157R, 156L, 157L) for selecting a control condition to be applied to the cooking menu or the control menu selected by the second selection means,
The input operation unit has a dial-type selection means 123 for selecting at least one of the cooking menu, the control menu, or the control conditions,
The dial-type selection means 123 selects at least one of the cooking menu, the control menu, or the control conditions in response to a rotation operation, and generates a voice input mode setting signal MC1 when an operation different from the rotation operation (movement in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 123A) is performed.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

Due to this configuration, for example, in the central operation unit 15M, at least one of the cooking menu, the control menu, or the control conditions can be selected by rotating the dial-type selection means 123, and when the dial-type selection means 123 is operated in a manner different from the rotating operation (movement in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 123A), it can be set to a voice input mode (voice input mode 3).
Therefore, the troublesome input process before the start of the heating operation can be efficiently performed by the single dial type selection means 123. This improves the operability of the user US and reduces the workload.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 in embodiment 4, the display unit 16 provided in correspondence with the dial-type selection means 123 can display candidates for cooking menus and control menus, improving the operability of preparation work before starting cooking.

Furthermore, in one form of the heating cooker in this embodiment 4, the voice input mode (voice input mode 1) can also be set by, for example, pressing the input key 153M once (long press operation) on the central operation unit 15M to select the collaborative cooking mode KM1.
Furthermore, the voice input mode (voice input mode 1) can also be set by pressing the input key 154M once (long press) on the central operation unit 15M to select the combined cooking mode KM2.

Therefore, in addition to first switching to voice input mode by pressing and holding input keys 153M, 154M, or input key 153R on the right operation unit, dial-type selection means 123, 123R can also be used to switch to voice input mode. Since there are two means for switching to voice input mode, voice input can be easily adopted even in the middle of an input task.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the fourth embodiment, as described particularly in FIG.
When the input process for one cooking cycle is completed and cooking is started, the voice input mode (voice input mode B, voice input mode C) is automatically released and the default touch input mode is restored, so that when starting input for the next cooking cycle, there is no need to touch input keys or the like just to release the voice input mode, which is convenient.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment, the control device 40 is configured not to simultaneously accept a command to start the voice input mode for the central operation unit (15M) and a command to start the voice input mode for the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L. In other words, among the three operation units (not shown) of the central operation unit 15M, the right operation unit 15R, and the left operation unit 15L, when the voice input mode is entered by the earliest touch operation ("long press" operation), the control device 40 prevents touch operations (setting of the voice input mode by "long press" operation) on the other two operation units until the input on the operation unit that entered the voice input mode is completed and the start key 113 (113R, 113L) is pressed.

Because of this configuration, in a cooking device 1 equipped with multiple input operation units (central operation unit 15M and left and right operation units 15L, 15R), if an input operation is performed using one input operation unit (for example, right operation unit 15R) and the input stage has already progressed to the voice input mode, even if the other input operation units (central operation unit 15M and left operation unit 15L) are "pressed and held" immediately thereafter, the input operation can continue by voice using the input operation unit that was started first (right operation unit 15R in the above example) without being affected (by the voice input mode setting) by the input operation unit that was started later. Therefore, even if the user US accidentally touches a different input operation unit, the voice input operation that has already started is not invalidated or interrupted midway.

Furthermore, in the cooking device according to the first disclosure, the control device 40 is configured such that, in one input operation section (e.g., central operation section 15M), when touch input of one input key (e.g., 153M) is enabled and input of control conditions (including cooking by obtaining recipe data CD) is completed in voice input mode, and in a standby state waiting for operation by the start key 113, the control device 40 does not accept a voice input mode setting signal from the other input operation section unless the standby state is canceled by the stop key 114 (114L, 114R) for cancellation.

Due to this configuration, in a cooking device 1 equipped with multiple input operation units (central operation unit 15M and left and right operation units 15L, 15R), when one input operation unit is performing input in voice input mode (selection of cooking menu and control menu, input of control conditions, acquisition process of recipe data CD) through communication with the outside, even if another input operation unit is operated, the input operation unit that starts operation later does not have any effect on the input operation unit that has already started the input process in voice input mode. In other words, the original input work can be performed without being affected by the input operation unit that was operated later (setting of voice input mode). Therefore, even if the user US accidentally touches a different input operation unit, the voice input work of the original input operation unit is not inadvertently disabled or interrupted.

As is clear from the above description, in this fourth embodiment, the cooking system according to the sixth disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one embodiment of the heating and cooking system according to the sixth disclosure includes:
A cooking device 1 for heating an object to be heated;
The cooking device includes a cloud server 300 or a communication terminal 200 that is connected to the cooking device 1 by wireless communication,
The communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 has a function of transmitting recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1,
The cooking appliance 1 has a function of acquiring the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 after the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed,
The cooking device 1 is provided with touch-type input keys 153M, 154M for selecting one cooking mode from among a plurality of cooking modes using a combination of a plurality of heating means, and a dial-type selection means 123 for selecting one from a plurality of cooking menus or control menus provided for each cooking mode in response to a rotation operation,
When the dial-type selection means 123 is moved in an axial direction passing through its rotation center after one of the input modes is selected by the touch-type input keys 153M and 154M, the cooking device 1 is set to a voice input mode (voice input mode 3);
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, for example, the touch-type input keys 153M and 154M on the central operation unit 15M can be used to switch to a voice input mode (voice input mode 1), so that the troublesome input process before the start of the heating operation can be input by voice. This improves the operability of the user US and reduces the workload.
Furthermore, by rotating the dial-type selection means 123, candidates for cooking menus and control menus can be easily displayed on the display unit 16 for selection, and by moving it in the axial direction, the voice input mode (voice input mode 3) can also be selected. Therefore, by simply holding the dial portion (knob portion), menu selection and voice input mode selection can be performed by performing two types of operations, which is expected to improve the efficiency of input work.

Other embodiments.
In order to explain each circuit, part, and each component of the device that constitutes the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200, data has been described by attaching symbols such as recipe data CD1 and recipe data CD2, but these two may be substantially the same data. For example, one recipe data (e.g., recipe data CD for hamburger steak) that is initially held in the cooking appliance 1 and recipe data (e.g., recipe data CD for hamburger steak) acquired from the outside via the communication unit 51 may have the same content.

In addition, the communication terminal 200, such as a smartphone or tablet-type terminal device (small portable personal computer), does not necessarily need to provide the recipe data acquired from the cloud server 300 to the cooking device 1, but may generate and store the recipe data by itself.

In addition, in the composite cooking mode KM2 in each embodiment described so far, when the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected, a control menu (for example, a heating operation pattern called "Defrost") is basically selected, and recipe data CD for a specific food item is not selected. However, the user US may use the cloud server 300 to select one recipe data CD of the composite cooking mode KM2 that can be applied to the cooking appliance 1, and have the cooking appliance 1 acquire the recipe data CD using the communication terminal 200 (voice input/output device 1000). This is the same for the single cooking mode KM3.

In the above explanation, for the sake of simplicity, the data is expressed with symbols such as "recipe data 1" and "recipe data 2", but this can mean that the contents of the two recipe data are different from each other, or that they are the same, and the difference in the symbols (1, 2, etc.) should not be interpreted as meaning that the data is different. Similarly, different symbols are sometimes used for explanation, such as recipe data CD1 and CD2, but these symbols are used for the sake of explanation, and do not mean that the contents of the data are different from each other just because of the difference in symbols.

The circuits, parts, and components of the devices illustrated in the above embodiments 1 to 4 are conceptual in function and do not necessarily have to be physically configured as illustrated. Furthermore, the functions of each of the devices and circuits, particularly the control device 40, heating control unit 43, first heating means HM1, second heating means HM2, third heating means HM3, fourth heating means HM4, and memory device 41, can be distributed and integrated, and the specific form is not limited to that illustrated, and all or part of them can be functionally or physically distributed and integrated in any unit depending on the function, operating status, etc.

The functions of the control device 40 and the heating control unit 43 are realized by a processing circuit. The processing circuit that realizes each function may be dedicated hardware or a processor that executes a program stored in a memory.

When the processing circuit is a processor, the functions of the control device 40 and the heating control unit 43 are realized by software, firmware, or a combination of software and firmware. The software and firmware are written as programs and stored in the storage device 41, which is a memory. The processor realizes the functions of the control device 40 and the heating control unit 43 by reading and executing the programs stored in the storage device 41.

These programs cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedures of the control device 40 and the heating control unit 43. The storage device 41 is typically a non-volatile or volatile semiconductor memory such as RAM, ROM, flash memory, EPROM, EEPROM, etc.

Furthermore, some of the data and programs in the recipe data storage unit 41 shown in FIG. 9 may not be stored in the cooking appliance 1 but in an external recording medium (such as a storage server). In this case, the cooking appliance 1 accesses the external recording medium (storage server) to obtain the necessary data and program information.

Furthermore, the operating programs of the control device 40, the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3 may be updated to appropriately modified or improved programs at the request of the user US or at the request of the manufacturer of the cooking appliance 1. In this case, for example, the modified or improved programs may be obtained through the communication unit 51.

One of the heating parts (IH coils 9L, 9M, 9R) of the first heating means HM1 for cooking on the top plate 3 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner. In this case, a gas flow valve is configured to be controlled by the control unit.
Further, a part or the whole of the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner or an induction heating source.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the input operation unit 15 has been described mainly as a "touch input" operation unit in which the user US touches the input command and a press (push button) operation unit, but it may also be used in combination with a "non-contact" input key that detects the movement of the user US's fingers or hand in a non-contact manner to input.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 15 may be changed to a voice input method that recognizes and inputs the voice of the user US. In the case of the voice input method, a microphone and a voice receiving unit for receiving the voice of the user US and converting it into a voice recognition signal correspond to the input operation unit.
Alternatively, a mechanical switch such as a contact type or a pressure type may be used in combination with the voice input method.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 15 may give commands to the cooking appliance 1 via a voice input/output device 1000 equipped with a voice input function, such as a smart speaker or an AI speaker.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the nutritional data DD is displayed on the central display unit 16M and the left and right display units 16L and 16R, respectively, but it may also be displayed on a display screen in another position (for example, the right heat display unit 17R) depending on the display screen of various cooking menus.
In addition, the standby initial screen is displayed on the central display section 16M and the left and right display sections 16L and 16R, but if there are other display sections, it may be displayed on those display sections. For example, the standby initial screen 16MH may be displayed on the right heating power display section 17R for the right heating port 4R immediately after operating the input key 153R. This can also be applied to the left display section 16L.

In addition, in the first embodiment (FIG. 32), the two types of components, major food components and nutritional components, are displayed on two screens, the food component display screen 16M1A and the nutritional component display screen 16M1B, but these two display screens may be displayed together (on one screen).

The user US may also press the function setting key 115 to switch to the function setting mode and limit the displayed nutritional components and food components to only specific nutritional components. Furthermore, the user US may press the input key 180 to switch to the voice input mode 2 and input by voice, thereby narrowing the range to only specific nutritional components and food components.

Furthermore, when all the heating and cooking steps are completed or during the heating pause periods P3 and P5 (see FIG. 33) of the coordinated cooking mode KM1, either the food component display screen 16M1A or the nutritional component display screen 16M1B, or both, may be displayed in response to a command from the user US or automatically.

The voice input/output device 1000, which can use a smart speaker or an AI speaker, can transmit and receive information via wireless communication at any time between a support server equipped with a voice translation function or a search function in a network environment, such as a cloud server 300.
Therefore, the voice input/output device 1000 can acquire the voice (natural language) uttered by the user US near the cooking appliance 1 as a voice signal, convert it into a command signal from the user US by the support server, and finally generate a command signal for the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, even if the user US is near the cooking appliance 1, even if both hands are occupied with cooking preparation or processing ingredients, limiting the frequency of directly touching the input operation unit 15, the user can conveniently operate the cooking appliance 1 with natural utterances (voice).

In the first to fourth embodiments, the input operation unit 15 was used as the means for selecting the various control menus and control conditions displayed on the first specific screen 16M1, the second specific screen 16M2, and the third specific screen 16M3, but the means may be provided within the display screen of the central display unit 16M or the left and right display units 16L and 16R, which are display means.

For example, the aforementioned Patent Publication No. 5833699, which proposes a technique for composite cooking, proposes a technique in which a composite cooking display screen is displayed, the names of the composite cooking menus are displayed on the display screen, and the user US directly touches the menu selection section with their finger to select a menu.

Therefore, the menu of cooking options available in the composite cooking mode KM2 or the collaborative cooking mode KM1, the names of the food to be cooked (a type of identification information), etc. may be displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2, and the user US may directly touch the display portion (also called the "icon" portion) with his/her finger to select the menu of the collaborative cooking mode, etc.

In the first embodiment, the communication unit 51 receives command signals and recipe data CD transmitted from outside the cooking appliance 1, and the cooking appliance 1 transmits each operation signal and command signal to the outside (operating state data OS). In addition, information indicating the progress of the start and end of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 may be transmitted each time. When configured in this manner, the user US can know the progress information (operating state data OS) via the communication terminal 200, etc., improving convenience.

As described in the first embodiment, a home gateway 411 having a function of receiving search result data on the inventory of the refrigerator 403 may be arranged as an information management device, and the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 403 may be connected by a wireless communication means (LAN) or a wide area network such as the Internet, so that the cooking appliance 1 can obtain inventory information on the refrigerator 403 and use it for cooking.

As a configuration of the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) 200 such as a smartphone, the display information, display form, design, etc. of the terminal side display unit (terminal side display screen) 216 and the central display unit 16M of the cooking appliance 1 are similar to each other, as described particularly in FIG. 50, but the cooking appliance database 217 and the remote operation information generating unit 219 for such display are not necessarily required. For example, the functions equivalent to the cooking appliance database 217 and the remote operation information generating unit 219 may be provided in, for example, an external server 417 (first server 321, second server 322), and when the communication terminal 200 receives an input (including voice input), it may transmit the input to the cloud server 300 of the external server 417, etc., and obtain the necessary response information from the cloud server 300.

The cooking appliance 1 receives the recipe data CD and other data directly or via the wireless router 340 from the information processing terminal 200, the external server 417, the first server 321, etc., but the cooking appliance 1 may receive the data via another relay device. For example, the remote control of another home appliance (e.g., a water heater) installed in the kitchen may be used as the relay device. Such a remote control is convenient because it is usually always connected to a power source. In this case, it is desirable for the relay device to have a built-in storage device that temporarily stores various data including commands transmitted from the information processing terminal 200, the first server 321, etc. Then, the various data transmitted from the cooking appliance 1 is configured to be temporarily stored in the storage device.

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The substantial scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The cooking device and cooking system disclosed herein can be widely used not only in the kitchens of ordinary homes, but also in kitchens in public facilities, stores, etc.

REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 1 Cooking device 2 Body 3 Top plate 4 Heating port 4L Left heating port 4C Center heating port 4R Right heating port 5 Exhaust port cover 6 Heating chamber 7 Door 8 Handle 9 IH coil 9C Center IH coil 9L Left IH coil 9R Right IH coil 10 Open/close detector 11 Microwave oscillator (magnetron)
12 Radiant heat heating means 12a Upper radiant heat heating means 12b Lower radiant heat heating means 13 Infrared sensor 14 Thermistor sensor 15 Input operation section 15L Left operation section (first operation section)
15M Central operation section (shared operation section)
15R Right operation section (second operation section)
16 Display section 16F Progress mark 16L Left display section 16M Center display section 16M1 First specific screen 16M1A Food composition display screen 16M1B Nutritional composition display screen 16M2 Second specific screen 16M3 Third specific screen 16MA Guidance screen 16MH Common screen (initial screen during standby)
16MM Receiving operation display screen 16R Right display section 17 Auxiliary display section 17L Left auxiliary display section 17M Center heating status display section 17R Right auxiliary display section 20 Main power switch 20A Button (key) for operating the main power switch
21 Light emitting unit 21M Individual light emitting unit 21R Individual light emitting unit 22 First display area 23 Second display area 24 Third display area 26 Light emitting control unit 27 Light emitting element (light emitting element group)
28 Fourth display area 29A-29B Display section 29C-29D Candidate display section 30 Group of temperature sensors 30A Temperature sensor 31 Infrared transmission section 32 Bottom wall 33 Installation space 35 Infrared transmission section 40 Control device 41 Storage device 42 Recipe data storage section 43 Heating control section 50 Audio notification section 51 Communication section (wireless communication module)
52 Input signal analysis unit 53 Data acquisition unit 54 Permission condition determination unit 55 Restriction unit 56 Audio signal receiving unit 57 Power supply circuit 58 Audio signal analysis unit 59 Human detection sensor 60A Display text 60B Two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code)
60C Two-dimensional information explanation 60E Caution display 60H Recommendation 60N Common information during standby 60P Acquisition operation support information 70 Input processing unit 90 Notification unit 107 Input key 107A First specific information 108 Input key 108A Second specific information 109 Input key 109A Third specific information 113 Start key 114 Stop key (cancel key)
115 Function setting key 116L Heating section identification section 116R Heating section identification section 117 Heating power display band 118 Additional information 120 Display information 123 Dial type selection means 153M Input key 153R Input key 154M Input key 155M Input key 156M Input key 157M Input key 158M Input key 159M Input key 160 Control menu identification information 161 Control menu identification information 162 Control menu identification information 164 Reference information 165 Additional information 166 Additional information 167 Identification information 168 Identification information 169 Identification information 170 Operation support information 172 Process information 173 External recipe identification section 174 Reception operation display section 179D Display information (voice input mode)
180 Input key (voice input only mode selection section)
190R Input key 191R Input key 200 Communication terminal (smartphone) (information processing terminal device)
210 Transmitter/Receiver 211 Communication Control Unit 212 Central Processing Unit (CPU)
213 ROM/RAM
214 Speaker 215 Touch operation unit 216 Terminal display unit (terminal display screen)
217 Cooking appliance database 218 Attitude detection unit 219 Remote operation information generation unit 220 Memory unit 221 NFC input/output unit 222 Voice input unit 223 Notification data 224 Remote control data 225 Display operation unit 226 Food ingredient/nutritional ingredient data 230 Recipe data acquisition unit 231 Recipe data transmission unit 232 Terminal side recipe selection unit 233 Food ingredient data acquisition unit 280 Identification information 281 Control condition display unit 300 Cloud server 301 Recipe data provision server 310 Light emitting element for microwave oven (LED)
311 Grill light emitting element (LED)
312 Light emitting element for oven (LED)
313 Central IH light emitting element (LED)
314 High temperature warning light emitting element (LED) group 314a Heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting element (LED)
314b IH high temperature warning light emitting element (LED)
321 First server 321A Input/output unit (input/output interface unit)
321C Control unit 321P Food component database 321R Memory unit 321S Command generation unit 322 Second server 322A Input/output unit (input/output interface unit)
322C Control unit 322R Memory unit 323 Third server 324 Stock information memory unit 325 Food ingredient consumption determination unit 326 Food ingredient information server 340 Wireless router (access point)
341 Electrode 343 Menu display unit 350 Touch panel device 351 Operation panel 353 Touch gesture determination device 354 Operation determination unit 355 Gesture mode determination unit 356 Gesture input information determination unit 357 Gesture area determination unit 358 Reference parameter storage unit 359 Notification unit 362 Reference information storage unit 402 Home appliance 403 Refrigerator 404 Television receiver 405 Air conditioner 406 Air purifier 408 Electric rice cooker (electric jar rice cooker)
409 Microwave oven 410 Lighting equipment 411 Home gateway 414 Power meter 415 Power line (main line)
416 Environment detection unit 417 External server 515 Display unit of recommended menu 516 Auxiliary information of recommended menu 517 Auxiliary information of recommended menu 518 Cooking reference image of recommended menu 523 Detail display instruction unit (icon)
550 Boiler (steam generator) (fourth heating means HM4)
600 Kitchen furniture 601 Kitchen 1000 Voice input/output device (information processing terminal device)
1301 Recipe data providing unit 1324 Stock information storage unit 1325 Food consumption determination unit CD Recipe data (cooking condition data)
DD Food composition information ET Prohibition period MC1 Voice input mode setting signal (voice input mode compatible signal)
NW Network OS Operation status data SD1 Inventory data TB Acquisition period TB1 Recipe data acquisition period TB2 Acquired recipe data cancellation period TB3 Acquired recipe data change period TX First time limit (first limit period)
US user.

Claims (8)

The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on an upper surface of the main body;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
an input operation unit for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means and the second heating means;
A notification means;
A control device that receives commands from the input operation unit;
A communication unit having a wireless communication function;
a data acquisition unit that acquires recipe data from an external source via the communication unit ,
the input operation unit includes a first selection means for selecting one of a plurality of cooking modes using the first heating means and the second heating means, and a dial-type selection means for selecting one cooking menu or control menu executable in the cooking mode when one of the cooking modes is selected by the first selection means,
the first selection means has a touch input key;
the input operation unit generates a voice input mode setting signal in response to an operation time of the input key;
when the control device receives the voice input mode setting signal from the input operation unit, the control device enables acquisition of the recipe data via the communication unit and receives a setting command for a control condition for the recipe data;
A heating cooker characterized by the above. The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on an upper surface of the main body;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
an input operation unit for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means and the second heating means;
A notification means;
a control device that receives a command from the input operation unit,
the input operation unit includes a first selection means for selecting one of a plurality of cooking modes using the first heating means and the second heating means, and a dial-type selection means for selecting one cooking menu or control menu executable in the cooking mode when one of the cooking modes is selected by the first selection means,
the first selection means has a touch input key;
the input operation unit generates a voice input mode setting signal in response to an operation time of the input key;
the control device performs an automatic cut-off process to cut off power when a command to set a control condition by voice is not completed within a time limit after receiving the voice input mode setting signal;
A heating cooker characterized by the above. The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on an upper surface of the main body;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
an input operation unit for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means and the second heating means;
A notification means;
a control device that receives a command from the input operation unit,
the input operation unit includes a first selection means for selecting one of a plurality of cooking modes using the first heating means and the second heating means, and a dial-type selection means for selecting one cooking menu or control menu executable in the cooking mode when one of the cooking modes is selected by the first selection means,
the first selection means has a touch input key;
the input operation unit generates a voice input mode setting signal in response to an operation time of the input key;
The notification means further includes a display unit,
the control device displays an initial screen during standby on the display unit, and thereafter, when the control device receives the voice input mode setting signal, displays a specific screen specific to the selected one of the cooking modes instead of the initial screen during standby;
A heating cooker characterized by the above. A heating cooker;
A cloud server or a communication terminal connected to the cooking appliance via wireless communication;
Equipped with
The communication terminal or the cloud server has a function of transmitting recipe data to the cooking appliance,
the cooking device has a function of acquiring the recipe data from the communication terminal or the cloud server after an initial standby screen is displayed,
The cooking device has an operation unit equipped with touch-type input keys,
The operation unit has a function of selecting one cooking mode and a function of switching from a touch input mode to a voice input mode according to a touch state of the input key,
The cooking device is provided with a dial-type selection means for selecting one of a plurality of linked cooking menus or a plurality of control menus for cooking in the cooking mode in response to a rotation operation;
A heating and cooking system comprising: The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on an upper surface of the main body;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
an input operation unit for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means and the second heating means;
A notification means;
an input signal analysis unit that determines an input from the input operation unit;
A control device that receives commands from the input operation unit;
Equipped with
the input operation unit includes a first selection means for selecting one from a plurality of cooking modes using the first heating means and the second heating means, and a dial-type selection means for selecting at least one of a cooking menu or a control menu in the cooking mode selected by the first selection means,
the first selection means is a touch-type input key provided for each of the cooking modes,
the input operation unit transmits time information corresponding to the touch operation of the input key to the input signal analysis unit;
when the input signal analysis unit determines that a voice input mode command has been received, the control device enables acquisition of recipe data from an external device and receives command data for executing the recipe data;
A heating cooker characterized by the above. A heating cooker;
A cloud server connected to the cooking appliance via a network using wireless communication;
Equipped with
The cloud server has a function of transmitting recipe data to the cooking appliance,
the cooking device has a function of switching from a touch input mode to a voice input mode in response to a touch state of a touch-type input key, and a function of selecting at least one of a cooking menu, a control menu, and a control condition by a dial-type selection means for each cooking mode selected in the touch input mode;
The cooking appliance is switched to the voice input mode and is in a standby state in which the recipe data can be acquired,
When the cloud server receives a request to provide the recipe data, the cloud server transmits the recipe data to the cooking appliance;
The cooking device acquires command data related to the recipe data in the voice input mode;
A heating and cooking system comprising: The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on an upper surface of the main body;
A second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
an input operation unit for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means and the second heating means;
A notification means;
a control device that receives a command from the input operation unit,
the input operation unit has, as touch input means, a first selection means for selecting one from a plurality of cooking modes using the first heating means and the second heating means, a second selection means for selecting one cooking menu or control menu from the cooking modes selected by the first selection means, and a third selection means for selecting a control condition to be applied to the cooking menu or the control menu selected by the second selection means;
The input operation unit has a dial type selection means,
The dial type selection means is
(1) selecting at least one of the cooking menu, the control menu, or the control condition in response to a rotation operation; and
(2) When an operation other than the rotation operation is performed, a voice input mode setting signal A is generated.
A heating cooker characterized by the above. A cooking device and a communication terminal connected to a cloud server via a network,
The communication terminal or the cloud server has a function of transmitting recipe data to the cooking appliance,
The cooking device has a function of acquiring the recipe data from the communication terminal or the cloud server,
The cooking device is provided with a touch-type input key for selecting one cooking mode from among a plurality of cooking modes using a combination of a plurality of heating means, and a dial-type selection means for selecting at least one from among a plurality of cooking menus or control menus provided for each of the cooking modes in response to a rotation operation,
The cooking device has a function of moving the dial-type selection means in the axial direction of the rotation center to set the mode to a voice input mode;
A heating and cooking system comprising:

Images